Radio Shack Electronic Keyboard 42 4062 User Guide

MD-1800 76-Key MIDI Keyboard  
www.radioshack.comSM  
OWNER’S MANUAL —  
Please read before using this equipment.  
42-4062  
© 2003 RadioShack Corporation.  
All Rights Reserved.  
RadioShack and RadioShack.com are trademarks used by  
RadioShack Corporation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GUIDELINES LAID DOWN BY FCC RULES FOR USE OF THE UNIT IN THE U.S.A. (not applicable to other areas).  
NOTICE  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15  
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,  
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user  
is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
FCC WARNING  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s  
authority to operate the equipment.  
Important!  
Please note the following important information before using this product.  
• Before using the optional AD-12 Adaptor to power the unit, be sure to check the AC Adaptor for  
any damage first. Carefully check the power cord for breakage, cuts, exposed wire and other serious  
damage. Never let children use an AC adaptor that is seriously damaged.  
Never attempt to recharge batteries.  
• Do not use rechargeable batteries.  
Never mix old batteries with new ones.  
• Use recommended batteries or equivalent types.  
• Always make sure that positive (+) and negative (–) poles are facing correctly as indicated near the  
battery compartment.  
• Replace batteries as soon as possible after any sign they are getting weak.  
• Do not short-circuit the battery terminals.  
• The product is not intended for children under 3 years.  
• Use only CASIO AD-12 adaptor.  
• The AC adaptor is not a toy.  
• Be sure to disconnect the AC adaptor before cleaning the product.  
CASIO ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.  
Unit 6, 1000  
North Circular Road  
London NW2 7JD, U.K.  
This mark is valid in the EU countries only.  
Please keep all information for future reference.  
735A-E-002A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
Congratulations on your selection of the CASIO  
electronic musical instrument.  
Symbol Examples  
Before using the instrument, be sure to carefully  
read through the instructions contained in this  
manual.  
This triangle symbol ( ) means that the  
user should be careful. (The example at  
left indicates electrical shock caution.)  
Please keep all information for future reference.  
This circle with a line through it (  
)
means that the indicated action must not  
be p erform ed . Ind ications w ithin or  
n earby th is sym bol are sp ecifically  
prohibited. (The example at left indicates  
that disassembly is prohibited.)  
Symbols  
Various symbols are used in this users guide and on  
the product itself to ensure that the product is used  
safely and correctly, and to prevent injury to the user  
and other persons as well as damage to property.  
Those symbols along with their meanings are shown  
below.  
Th e black d ot ( ) m ean s th at th e  
ind icated action must be performed .  
Indications within this symbol are actions  
that are specifically instructed to be  
performed. (The example at left indicates  
that the power plug must be unplugged  
from the electrical socket.)  
DANGER  
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored  
or applied incorrectly, creates the danger of death  
or serious personal injury.  
WARNING  
This indication stipulates matters that have the risk  
of causing death or serious injury if the product is  
operated incorrectly while ignoring this indication.  
CAUTION  
This indication stipulates matters that have the risk  
of causing injury as well as matters for which there  
is the likelihood of occurrence of physical damage  
only if the product is operated incorrectly while  
ignoring this indication.  
735A-E-003A  
E-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
Batteries  
DANGER  
Misuse of batteries can cause them to leak,  
resulting in damage to nearby objects, or to  
explod e, creating the risk of fire and  
personal injury. Always make sure you  
observe the following precautions.  
Never try to take batteries apart or allow  
them to become shorted.  
Alkaline Batteries  
Perform the following steps immediately if  
fluid leaking from alkaline batteries ever  
gets into your eyes.  
1. Do not rub your eyes! Rinse them with  
water.  
Never expose batteries to heat or dispose  
2. Contact your physician immediately.  
Leaving alkaline battery fluid in your eyes  
can lead to loss of sight.  
of them by incineration.  
Never mix old batteries with new ones.  
Never mix batteries of different types.  
Do not charge the batteries.  
Make sure the positive (+) and negative  
() end s of the batteries are facing  
correctly.  
WARNING  
Smoke, Strange Odor, Overheating  
Continued use of the product while it is  
emitting smoke, a strange odor, or heat  
creates the risk of fire and electric shock.  
Take the following steps immediately.  
1. Turn off power.  
Do not incinerate the product.  
Never throw the product into fire.  
Doing so can cause it to explode, creating  
the risk of fire and personal injury.  
Water and Foreign Matter  
2. If you are using the AC adaptor for  
power, unplug it from the wall outlet.  
3. Contact your original retailer or an  
authorized CASIO Service Provider.  
Water, other liquids, and foreign matter  
(such as pieces of metal) getting into the  
product create the risk of fire and electric  
sh ock. Take th e follow in g step s  
immediately.  
AC Adaptor  
1. Turn off power.  
Misuse of the AC adaptor creates the risk  
of fire and electric shock. Always make sure  
you observe the following precautions.  
Be sure to use only the AC adaptor that  
is specified for this product.  
2. If you are using the AC adaptor for  
power, unplug it from the wall outlet.  
3. Contact your original retailer or an  
authorized CASIO Service Provider.  
Use only a power source whose voltage  
is the within the rating marked on the  
AC adaptor.  
Do not overload electrical outlets and  
extension cords.  
Disassembly and Modification  
Never try to take this product apart or  
modify it in any way. Doing so creates the  
risk of electric shock, burn injury, or other  
p erson al in ju ry. Leave all in tern al  
inspection, adjustment, and maintenance up  
to your original retailer or authorized  
CASIO Service Provider.  
AC Adaptor  
Misuse of the AC adaptors electric cord  
can damage or break it, creating the risk of  
fire and electric shock. Always make sure  
you observe the following precautions.  
Never place heavy objects on the cord or  
subject it to heat.  
Never try to modify the cord or subject it  
to excessive bending.  
Never twist or stretch the cord.  
Should the electric cord or plug become  
damaged, contact your original retailer  
or authorized CASIO Service Provider.  
Dropping and Impact  
Continued use of this product after it has  
been damaged by dropping or subjecting it  
to strong impact creates the risk of fire and  
electric shock. Take the following steps  
immediately.  
1. Turn off power.  
2. If you are using the AC adaptor for  
power, unplug it from the wall outlet.  
3. Contact your original retailer or an  
authorized CASIO Service Provider.  
AC Adaptor  
Never touch the AC adapter while your  
hands are wet.  
Doing so creates the risk of electric shock.  
E-2  
735A-E-004A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
Plastic Bags  
CAUTION  
Never place the plastic bag the product  
comes in over your head or in your mouth.  
Doing so creates the risk of suffocation.  
Particular care concerning this precaution  
is requ ired w here sm all child ren are  
present.  
AC Adaptor  
Misuse of the AC adaptor creates the risk  
of fire and electric shock. Always make sure  
you observe the following precautions.  
Do not locate the electric cord near a  
stove or other sources of heat.  
Never pull on the cord when unplugging  
from the electrical outlet. Always grasp  
the AC adaptor when unplugging.  
Keep off of the product and stand.*  
Climbing onto the product or stand can  
cause it to tip over or become damaged.  
Particular care concerning this precaution  
is requ ired w here sm all child ren are  
present.  
AC Adaptor  
Misuse of the AC adaptor creates the risk  
of fire and electric shock. Always make sure  
you observe the following precautions.  
Insert the AC adaptor into the wall outlet  
as far as it will go.  
Unplug the AC adaptor from the wall  
outlet during lightening storms or before  
leaving on a trip or other long-term  
absence.  
Location  
Avoid locating the product on an unstable  
stand, on an uneven surface, or any other  
unstable location. An unstable location can  
cause the product to fall over, creating the  
risk of personal injury.  
At least once a year, unplug the AC  
Adaptor from the wall outlet and wipe  
away any dust that is built up in the area  
around the prongs of the plug.  
Relocating the Product  
Before relocating the prod uct, alw ays  
unplug the AC adaptor from the wall outlet  
an d d iscon n ect all oth er cables an d  
connecting cords. Leaving cords connected  
creates the risk of damage to the cords, fire,  
and electric shock.  
Cleaning  
Before cleaning the product, always unplug  
the AC adaptor from the wall outlet first.  
Leaving the AC adaptor plugged in creates  
the risk of damage to the AC adaptor, fire,  
and electric shock.  
Batteries  
Misuse of batteries can cause them to leak  
resulting in damage to nearby objects, or to  
explod e, creating the risk of fire and  
personal injury. Always make sure you  
observe the following precautions.  
Use only batteries that are specified for  
use with this product.  
Remove batteries from the product if you  
do not plan to use it for a long time.  
Connectors  
Connect only the specified devices and  
equipment to the products connectors.  
Connection of a non-specified device or  
equipment creates the risk of fire and  
electric shock.  
735A-E-005A  
E-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
Location  
IMPORTANT!  
Avoid the follow ing locations for this  
product. Such locations create the risk of  
fire and electric shock.  
Areas subject to high humidity or large  
amounts of dust  
When using batteries, be sure to replace them or shift to  
one of the alternate power sources whenever you notice  
any of the following symptoms.  
• Dim power indicator  
• Instrument does not turn on  
In food preparation areas or other areas  
subject to oil smoke  
• Display that is flickering, dim, or difficult to read  
• Abnormally low speaker/headphone volume  
• Distortion of sound output  
• Occasional interruption of sound when playing at high  
volumes  
• Sudden power failure when playing at high volumes  
• Flickering or dimming of the display when playing at high  
volume  
Near air conditioning equipment, on a  
heated carpet, in areas exposed to direct  
sunlight, inside of a vehicle parked in  
the sun, or any other area that subjects  
the product to high temperatures  
Display Screen  
• Continued sound output even after you release a key  
Atone that is totally different from the one that is selected  
• Abnormal rhythm pattern and demo tune play  
• Loss of power, sound distortion, or low volume when  
playing from a connected computer or MIDI device  
• Sudden power failure while reading from or writing to a  
diskette (WK-3500 only)  
Never push on the display screens LCD  
panel or subject it to strong impact. Doing  
so can cause the LCD panels glass to  
crack, creating the risk of personal injury.  
Should the LCD panel ever crack or  
break, never touch the liquid inside of  
the panel. LCD panel liquid can cause  
skin irritation.  
Should LCD panel liquid ever get inside  
your mouth, immediately wash out your  
mouth with water and contact your  
physician.  
Should LCD panel liquid ever get into  
your eyes or onto your skin, rinse with  
clear water for at least 15 minutes, and  
then contact a physician.  
Sound Volume  
Do not listen to music at very loud volumes  
for long periods. Particular care concerning  
this precaution is required when using  
headphones. High volume settings can  
damage your hearing.  
Heavy Objects  
Never place heavy object on top of the  
product.  
Doing so can make the product top heavy,  
causing the product to tip over or the object  
to fall from it, creating the risk of personal  
injury.  
Correct Stand* Assembly  
An incorrectly assembled stand can tip over,  
causing the product to fall and creating the  
risk of personal injury.  
Make sure you assemble the stand correctly,  
following the assembly instructions that  
come with it. Make sure you mount the  
product on the stand correctly.  
* Stand is available as an option.  
E-4  
735A-E-006A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Congratulations upon your selection of this CASIO musical instrument. This keyboard provides you with the following features  
and functions.  
516 Tones Include Rich Advanced Tones  
A total of 300 Advanced Tones are programmed with DSP tones to make them richer and more powerful. Advanced tones like  
Stereo Piano and Tremolo Electric Piano enhance the Piano and Electric Piano tones to create a totally new sound.  
50 Drawbar Organ Tones  
In addition to the 516 standards tones, the keyboard also includes 50 realistic drawbar organ tones. Drawbar organ tones can be  
controlled using nine digital drawbars. You can also select percussion or key click, and even edit the parameters of preset tone  
and save up to 100 original tones in user tone memory.  
Flash Memory  
Built-in Flash memory lets you expand your selection of tones and rhythms by downloading data from the CASIO MUSIC SITE,  
or from other sources. You can also store up to 200 SMF format music files for playback.  
PIANO SETTING Button  
The press of a button optimizes the keyboard setup for piano play.  
140 Preset Rhythms + 16 User Rhythms  
A selection of 140 rhythms includes accompaniments for everything from rock to pops and jazz.  
You can also transfer accompaniment data from your computer and store up to 16 of them as user rhythms in keyboard memory.  
Auto Accompaniment  
Simply play a chord and the corresponding rhythm, bass and chord parts play automatically. One-touch Preset instantly recalls  
the most suitable tone and tempo settings to match the rhythm you are using.  
Big, Information-packed Display  
A big built-in display shows chord names, tempo setting, keyboard information, staff notation of notes played, and more for full  
support of all your keyboard play. A built-in backlight keeps the display easy to read, even in total darkness.  
Song Memory  
Record up to six parts in memory, along with their tone, volume, pan position, and other parameters for later playback. Realistic  
ensemble play can also be created using the Auto Accompaniment function.  
Synthesizer Mode  
Edit built in sounds to produce your own original creations. Up to 120 of your own sounds can be stored in memory for recall, just  
like the built-in tones.  
General MIDI compatibility  
The General MIDI tones of this keyboard let you connect to a personal computer to enjoy desktop musiccapabilities. This  
keyboard can be used as a desktop music input device or sound source, and it's just the thing for playback of commercially  
available pre-recorded General MIDI music software.  
Powerful effects  
A collection of powerful effects, such as DSP reverb, chorus, and more, give you total control over the type of sound you want.  
You can even change the parameters of an effect to create your own, original effects. A 4-band equalizer is also included.  
735A-E-007A  
E-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Mixer  
You can specify tone, volume, pan position, and other parameters for each built-in Auto Accompaniment part. You can also  
control the same parameters for each channel during MIDI input.  
Registration Memory  
Keyboard setups can be stored in memory for later recall and instant settings whenever you need them. Up to 32 setups (4 setups  
x 8 banks) can be stored in registration memory.  
Data download from your computer  
You can use your computer to download data from the CASIO MUSIC SITE.  
SmartMediaTM Card Slot  
A built-in SmartMedia card slot helps to simplify transfer of data from a computer and lets you store volumes of data for later  
recall when you need it. You can also load a card with a standard MIDI file (SMF) and play it back on the keyboard.  
Built-in floppy disk drive (WK-3500 only)  
Save original tones or songs you created with the Song Memory to disk for long-term storage. You can also load a disk with a  
standard MIDI file (SMF) and play it back on the keyboard.  
E-6  
735A-E-008A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Welcome...  
Using the Drawbar Organ  
Mode.....................................E-26  
Safety Precautions ................E-1  
Introduction ...........................E-5  
Contents.................................E-7  
General Guide......................E-10  
To select a drawbar organ tone..............E-28  
To edit a drawbar organ tone .................E-28  
Parameter Details ..................................E-29  
To save an edited drawbar organ tone...E-30  
Applying Effects to  
Tones....................................E-31  
Attaching the Score Stand ..................... E-11  
Playing a Demo Tune.............................E-12  
About the display ...................................E-14  
Effect Blocks ..........................................E-31  
Selecting a DSP Type ............................E-32  
About the DSP Button ............................E-34  
Selecting REVERB ................................E-34  
Selecting CHORUS................................E-36  
Using the Equalizer ................................E-37  
Power Supply ......................E-16  
Using batteries .......................................E-16  
Using the AC Adaptor.............................E-17  
Auto Power Off.......................................E-17  
Turning Off the Keyboard .......................E-18  
Memory Contents...................................E-18  
Auto Accompaniment .........E-38  
About the MODE Button ........................E-38  
Selecting a Rhythm ................................E-39  
Playing a Rhythm ...................................E-39  
Adjusting the Tempo...............................E-39  
Using Auto Accompaniment ...................E-40  
Using an Intro Pattern ............................E-43  
Using a Fill-in Pattern.............................E-43  
Using a Rhythm Variation.......................E-43  
Connections ........................E-19  
Basic Operations.................E-22  
To play the keyboard ..............................E-22  
Selecting a Tone.....................................E-22  
PIANO SETTING Button ........................E-24  
Using the PITCH BEND Wheel ..............E-25  
Using the MODULATION .......................E-25  
Synchro Starting Accompaniment  
with Rhythm Play ...................................E-44  
Finishing with an Ending Pattern ...........E-44  
Using One-touch Preset.........................E-45  
735A-E-009A  
E-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Using Auto Harmonize ...........................E-45  
Adjusting the Accompaniment Volume...E-46  
Correcting Mistakes While Step  
Recording...............................................E-69  
Editing Memory Contents.......................E-70  
Editing a Song........................................E-72  
Mixer Function.....................E-47  
What you can do with the Mixer .............E-47  
Turning Channels On and Off ................E-47  
Using the Parameter Edit Mode .............E-48  
How Parameters Work ...........................E-49  
Keyboard Settings ..............E-74  
Using Layer ............................................E-74  
Using Split ..............................................E-75  
Using Layer and Split Together ..............E-76  
Transposing the Keyboard .....................E-77  
Using Touch Response ..........................E-78  
Tuning the Keyboard ..............................E-78  
Changing Other Settings........................E-79  
Synthesizer Mode................E-51  
Synthesizer Mode Functions..................E-51  
Creating a User Tone .............................E-54  
Storing a User Tone In Memory .............E-57  
Using the SMF Player .........E-84  
Registration Memory ..........E-59  
Playing Back an SMF.............................E-86  
Configuring Other Settings.....................E-87  
Registration Memory Features...............E-59  
To Save a Setup in Registration  
Memory ..................................................E-60  
MIDI.......................................E-89  
To Recall a Setup from Registration  
Memory ..................................................E-60  
What is MIDI? ........................................E-89  
General MIDI..........................................E-89  
Song Memory Function ......E-61  
Sending and Receiving MIDI  
Tracks ....................................................E-61  
Basic Song Memory operations .............E-61  
Using Real-time Recording ....................E-62  
Mixer Mode Settings ..............................E-63  
Playing Back from Song Memory...........E-64  
Messages...............................................E-90  
MIDI Settings .........................................E-90  
Using the Data Download Service .........E-91  
Saving Data..........................E-92  
Recording Melody and Chords  
Using a SmartMedia Card......................E-93  
with Step Recording ...............................E-64  
Using the Floppy Disk Drive  
Recording Multiple Tracks......................E-67  
(WK-3500 Only) .....................................E-94  
E-8  
735A-E-010A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Using External Storage Media ...............E-96  
Saving Files ...........................................E-98  
Loading a File ........................................E-99  
Renaming a File ...................................E-100  
Deleting a File ......................................E-101  
Formatting External Storage Media .....E-102  
Inputting Characters.............................E-103  
SmartMedia Card Error Messages ......E-104  
Disk Drive Error Messages  
(WK-3500 Only) ...................................E-105  
Troubleshooting ................E-106  
Specifications....................E-109  
Care of your Instrument ... E-112  
Appendix ............................... A-1  
Tone List...................................................A-1  
Drum Assignment List ............................A-12  
Rhythm List ............................................A-14  
Fingered Chord Chart ............................A-15  
Effect List ...............................................A-17  
DSP Algorithm List .................................A-19  
MIDI Implementation Chart  
Company and product names used in this  
manual may be registered trademarks of  
others.  
735A-E-011A  
E-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Guide  
1
2 3  
4 5 6  
7
D E  
F
G
H
8
9
0
A
B
C
I
J
K
Q
L
M
N
O
P
1
2
*
M
*
3
R S  
T
U
*
V
W
X
a
b
c
Y
Z
[
\
]
_
E-10  
735A-E-012A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Guide  
Illustrations in this Users Guide shows the WK-3500.  
1 POWER button  
M Speaker  
2 Power indicator  
N Rhythm list  
O Tone list  
3 MODE button  
4 EFFECT button  
P Display  
5 SYNTH button  
Q DEMO button*4  
6 MIXER button  
R
bWK-3500  
PHONES terminal  
7 TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button  
8 VOLUME knob  
bWK-3000  
PHONES/OUTPUT terminal  
9 ONE TOUCH PRESET button  
0 ACCOMP VOLUME button  
A SONG MEMORY button  
S CHORD root names  
T Percussion instrument list  
U Chord types name  
B
bWK-3500  
V SMF PLAYER button  
DISK/CARD button  
W CHANNEL button(1~16, DSP)/drawbar buttons  
X DRAWBAR ORGAN button  
Y INTRO/ENDING 1/2 buttons  
Z VARIATION/FILL-IN 1/2 buttons  
[ SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button  
\ START/STOP button  
bWK-3000  
CARD button  
C DATA ACCESS lamp  
D RHYTHM button  
E TONE button  
F DSP button  
G PIANO SETTING button  
] TEMPO buttons  
[̆] [̄] [̇] [̈]  
H
/
/
/
CURSOR button  
_ SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons  
a) BANK button  
I EXIT button  
b) REGISTRATION buttons  
c) STORE button  
J AUTO HARMONIZE button  
K SPLIT button  
L LAYER button  
Attaching the Score Stand*1  
Insert the score stand into the slot at the top  
of the keyboard as shown in the illustration.  
735A-E-013A  
E-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Guide  
*2  
a
Number buttons  
For input of numbers to  
change displayed settings.  
Negative values can be  
changed only by using [+]  
and [] to increment and  
decrement the displayed  
value.  
b
[+]/[] buttons  
(YES/NO)  
*3  
• WK-3500  
• WK-3000  
c
d
c
d
c
d
e
PITCH BEND wheel  
MODULATION wheel  
MODULATION button  
MODULATION button lamp  
PITCH BEND wheel  
c
d
e
Playing a Demo Tune*4  
Pressing the DEMO button starts demo tune play. There are 3 demo tunes, which continuously play in sequence. To stop demo  
tune play, press either the DEMO button or the START/ STOP button.  
NOTE  
Pressing the [+]/[] buttons skips to the next demo tune.  
The PIANO SETTING button, Layer, and Split are disabled while a demo tune is playing.  
E-12  
735A-E-014A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Guide  
Front Panel  
• WK-3500 only  
f
g
Access lamp  
Eject button  
g
f
Rear Panel  
• WK-3500  
• WK-3000  
h
i
j
k
l
h
i
j
k
MIDI  
MIDI  
SUSTAIN/  
R
L/MONO  
SUSTAIN/  
ASSIGNABLE JACK  
LINE OUT  
DC 12V  
ASSIGNABLE JACK  
DC 12V  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
h
i
j
k
l
h
i
j
k
MIDI OUT terminal  
MIDI IN terminal  
SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK terminal  
MIDI OUT terminal  
MIDI IN terminal  
SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK terminal  
DC 12V terminal  
LINE OUT R, LINE OUT L/MONO terminal  
DC 12V terminal  
Rear Panel  
m
Card slot  
m
735A-E-015A  
E-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Guide  
About the display  
1
2 3  
4
5
G r a n d P n o  
15  
14  
13 12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
1. TONE/RHYTHM indicator  
TONE is shown during tone selection and display, while RHYTHM is shown during rhythm selection and display.  
2. Tone/Rhythm number (number area)  
Number of currently selected tone or rhythm. The TONE/RHYTHM indicator shows whether the number is a tone or rhythm.  
This area also shows other information in other modes.  
3. Chord name display  
Shows chord names while Auto Accompaniment is being used.  
4. Tone/Rhythm name (text area)  
Name of currently selected tone or rhythm. The TONE/RHYTHM indicator shows whether the name is a tone or rhythm. This  
area also shows other information in other modes.  
5. Octave symbol 1  
One symbol indicates the note being produced by the keyboard is one octave higher than the note shown in the staff notation  
area 6. Two symbols indicate two octaves higher.  
6. Staff notation area  
Notes you play on the keyboard, notes played back from song memory, chord forms, and received MIDI data* are shown  
here.  
7. Octave symbol 2  
One symbol indicates the note being produced by the keyboard is one octave lower than the note shown in the staff notation  
area 6.  
8. Indicators  
An indicator appears to indicate that a function (Song Memory, SMF player, Auto Harmonize, Split, Layer) is currently in use.  
9. Beat number  
Shows the beat number during rhythm and Auto Accompaniment play, and while the Song Memory and SMF Player are  
turned on.  
10. Measure  
Shows the measure number from the start of play during rhythm and Auto Accompaniment play, and while the Song Memory  
and SMF Player are turned on.  
11. Tempo indicator  
Shows the tempo as a value indicating the number of beats per minute during rhythm and Auto Accompaniment play, and  
while the Song Memory is turned on. This display area also shows other information in other modes.  
12. Metronome  
You can turn on the metronome to provide a reference beat for your keyboard play.  
E-14  
735A-E-016A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Guide  
13. Level meter  
The numbers 1 through 16 correspond to Mixer channels. The level meter indicates which channels are on and off, and also  
indicates the volume level.  
Drawbar Organ Mode  
In the Drawbar Organ Editing Mode, the level meter shows the position of each drawbar and the status of each percussion  
parameter.  
14. Graphic keyboard  
Notes you play on the keyboard, notes played back from song memory, and received MIDI data* are indicated on the graphic  
keyboard.  
15. Mode indicators  
Pointers appear next to these mode names to indicate that the Transpose, Keyboard Settings, Mixer, Synth, Effect, or Disk/  
Card mode is currently active.  
* Any receive data outside the range of E1 to G7 is not displayed.  
NOTE  
Display examples shown in this Users Guide are intended for illustrative purposes only. The actual text and values that  
appear on the display may differ from the examples shown in this Users Guide.  
Due to LCD element characteristics, display contrast changes depending on the angle from which you view it. The initial  
default contrast setting is one that allows easy viewing for a musician seated directly in front of the display. You can also  
adjust the contrast to the level that suits your particular needs. For more information, see page E-82.  
735A-E-017A  
E-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Supply  
This keyboard can be powered by current from a standard  
household wall outlet (using the specified AC adaptor) or by  
batteries. Always make sure you turn the keyboard off  
whenever you are not using it.  
Important Battery Information  
The following shows the approximate battery life.  
Alkaline batteries ............................. 4 hours  
The above valu e is stand ard battery life at norm al  
temperature, with the keyboard volume at a medium  
setting. Temperature extremes or playing at very loud  
volume settings can shorten battery life.  
Using batteries  
Always make sure you turn off the keyboard before loading  
or replacing batteries.  
Any of the following symptoms indicate low battery power.  
Replace batteries as soon as possible whenever any of  
the following occurs.  
To load batteries  
Dim power indicator  
Instrument does not turn on  
1 Remove the battery compartment cover.  
Display that is flickering, dim, or difficult to read  
Abnormally low speaker/ headphone volume  
Distortion of sound output  
Occasional interruption of sound when playing at high  
volumes  
Sudden power failure when playing at high volumes  
Flickering or dimming of the display when playing at  
high volume  
Continued sound output even after you release a key  
A tone that is totally different from the one that is  
selected  
Abnormal rhythm pattern and demo tune play  
Loss of power, sound distortion, or low volume when  
playing from a connected computer or MIDI device  
Sudden power failure while reading from or writing to  
a diskette (WK-3500 only)  
2 Load six D-size batteries into the battery  
compartment.  
Make sure that the positive (+) and negative () ends  
are facing correctly.  
WARNING  
Misuse of batteries can cause them to leak, resulting in  
damage to nearby objects, or to explode, creating the risk of  
fire and personal injury. Always make sure you observe the  
following precautions.  
3 Insert the tabs on the battery compartment cover  
into the holes provided and close the cover.  
tab  
Never try to take batteries apart or allow them to  
become shorted.  
Never expose batteries to heat or dispose of them by  
incineration.  
Never mix old batteries with new ones.  
Never mix batteries of different types.  
Do not charge the batteries.  
Make sure the positive (+) and negative () ends of  
the batteries are facing correctly.  
NOTE  
CAUTION  
The keyboard may not function correctly if you load or  
replace batteries with power turned on. If this happens,  
turning the keyboard off and then back on again should  
return functions back to normal.  
Misuse of batteries can cause them to leak resulting in  
damage to nearby objects, or to explode, creating the risk of  
fire and personal injury. Always make sure you observe the  
following precautions.  
Use only batteries that are specified for use with this  
product.  
Remove batteries from the product if you do not plan  
to use it for a long time.  
E-16  
735A-E-018A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Supply  
CAUTION  
Using the AC Adaptor  
Misuse of the AC adaptor creates the risk of fire and electric  
shock. Always make sure you observe the following  
precautions.  
Make sure that you use only the AC adaptor specified for  
this keyboard.  
Do not locate the electric cord near a stove or other  
sources of heat.  
Specified AC Adaptor: AD-12  
Never pull on the cord when unplugging from the  
electrical outlet. Always grasp the AC adaptor when  
unplugging.  
Insert the AC adaptor into the wall outlet as far as it  
will go.  
AC adaptor AD-12  
MIDI  
SUSTAIN/  
ASSIGNABLE JACK  
R
L/MONO  
LINE OUT  
DC 12V  
OUT  
IN  
Unplug the AC adaptor from the wall outlet during  
lightening storms or before leaving on a trip or other  
long-term absence.  
At least once a year, unplug the AC adaptor from the  
wall outlet and wipe away any dust that is built up in  
the area around the prongs of the plug.  
AC outlet  
Also note the following important warnings and precautions  
when using the AC adaptor.  
IMPORTANT!  
Make sure that the keyboard is turned off before  
connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor.  
Using the AC adaptor for a long time can cause it to  
become warm to the touch. This is normal and does not  
indicate malfunction.  
WARNING  
Misuse of the AC adaptor creates the risk of fire and electric  
shock. Always make sure you observe the following  
precautions.  
Be sure to use only the AC adaptor that is specified  
for this product.  
Use only a power source whose voltage is within the  
rating marked on the AC adaptor.  
Do not overload electrical outlets and extension cords.  
Auto Power Off  
When you are using battery power, keyboard power turns  
off au tom atically w h en ever you leave it on w ith ou t  
performing any operation for about 6 minutes. When this  
happens, press the POWER button to turn power back on.  
Never place heavy objects on the cord or subject it to  
heat.  
Never try to modify the cord or subject it to excessive  
bending.  
NOTE  
Never twist or stretch the cord.  
Auto Power Off is disabled (it does not function) when  
you are using the AC adaptor to power the keyboard.  
Should the electric cord or plug become damaged,  
contact your original retailer or authorized CASIO  
Service Provider.  
Never touch theAC adaptor while your hands are wet.  
Doing so creates the risk of electric shock.  
To disable Auto Power Off  
Hold down the TONE button while turning on the keyboard  
to disable Auto Power Off.  
When Auto Power Off is disabled, the keyboard does not  
turn off automatically no matter how long it is left with no  
operation being performed.  
Auto Power Off is automatically enabled whenever you  
turn on keyboard power.  
735A-E-019A  
E-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Supply  
Settings  
Saving Setups and Memory Contents  
Tone, rhythm, and other main keyboard settingsin effect  
w hen you turn off the keyboard manually by pressing  
POWER button or when Auto Power Off turns off power are  
still in effect the next time you turn power back on.  
About Flash memory  
Your keyboard comes with built-in Flash memory, which can  
continue to hold data even when electrical power is totally  
cut off. This means that even after batteries go completely  
dead, you can attach the AC adaptor, turn on power, and still  
recall data stored in memory.  
Main Keyboard Settings  
Tone number, layer, split, split point, drawbar organ  
tone settings, transpose, tuning, and contrast settings,  
touch response, reverb, chorus, DSP, equalizer, rhythm  
number, tempo, keyboard channel, MIDI In Chord  
Judge on/ off, accomp MIDI out on/ off, assignable  
jack setting, accompaniment volume, user area tones  
(Synthesizer Mode), user area accompaniments, user  
DSP area, pitch bend range, Auto Harmonize on/ off,  
Auto Harmonize type, Mixer hold, DSP hold, Auto  
Accompaniment mode, all Mixer parameters, all  
Synthesizer Mode parameters, Song Memory song  
numbers, SMF player settings (play mode, manual  
play part, SMF playback volume)  
You can back up keyboard memory contents and other data  
using the media described below.  
SmartMediaTM Card  
See Using a SmartMedia Cardon page E-93.  
Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 only)  
See Using the Floppy Disk Drive (WK-3500 Only)on page  
E-94.  
IMPORTANT!  
When running under battery power, be sure to replace  
batteries as soon a possible after the first signs of low  
battery power (dim power indicator lamp, dim display  
characters, etc.) Though the keyboards Flash memory  
is non-volatile (which means that data is not lost when  
power is interrupted), data can be lost if power suddenly  
fails while data is being written to flash memory*.  
* While storing or deleting user data, while recording  
with the synthesizer, while transferring data from a  
computer, etc.  
Turning Off the Keyboard  
Be sure to press the POWER button to turn off power and  
make sure that the LCD backlight is off before disconnecting  
the AC adaptor or doing anything else.  
Never disconnect the AC adaptor while the keyboard is  
turned on or try to turn off power using any other technique  
besides pressing the POWER button. Doing so can cause  
the contents of the keyboards Flash memory to become  
corrupted. Strange keyboard operation and abnormal  
startu p w hen p ow er is tu rned on are sym p tom s of  
corrupted Flash memory contents. See Troubleshooting”  
on page E-106 for more information.  
Initializing the Keyboard  
Use the procedure on page E-80 to initialize the keyboard,  
which clears all memory data and returns settings to their  
initial factory defaults.  
The keyboard will not turn off if you press the POWER  
button while a user data store, a system initialization, a  
SmartMedia card format, or a floppy diskette format (WK-  
3500 only) operation is being performed. Wait until the  
ongoing operation is complete and then press the POWER  
button again to turn off the keyboard.  
Memory Contents  
In ad d ition to the above settings, d ata stored in the  
Registration Mode and Song Memory Mode is also retained  
when keyboard power is turned off.  
E-18  
735A-E-020A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
3
Connecting to a Musical Instrument Amplifier  
• WK-3500  
Use commercially available cords to connect to the two jacks  
Phones and Line Out Terminals  
3
as shown in Figure . It is up to you to purchase connecting  
Before connecting phones or other external equipment, be  
sure to first turn down the volume settings of the keyboard  
and the connected equipment. You can then adjust volume  
to the desired level after connections are complete.  
cables like the ones shown in the illustration for connection.  
Use the keyboards VOLUME knob to adjust the volume level.  
If your amplifier has only one input jack, connect a cord to  
the L/ MONO jack only.  
[Front]  
NOTE  
You can also connect the keyboards MIDI terminal to a  
computer or sequencer. See MIDIon page E-89 for  
details.  
PHONES Terminal  
1
Stereo standard plug  
1
Connecting Phones (Figure  
)
Connecting phones cuts off output from the keyboards built-  
in speakers, so you can play even late at night without  
disturbing anyone.  
[Rear Panel]  
Audio amplifier AUX IN, etc.  
PIN plug  
LEFT  
(White)  
RIGHT  
(Red)  
MIDI  
SUSTAIN/  
R
L/MONO  
ASSIGNABLE JACK  
LINE OUT  
DC 12V  
OUT  
IN  
Standard jacks  
Standard plugs  
Guitar amplifier,  
keyboard amplifier, etc.  
INPUT 1  
INPUT 2  
2
Connecting to Audio Equipment  
Use commercially available cords to connect to the two jacks  
2
as shown in Figure . It is up to you to purchase connecting  
cables like the ones shown in the illustration for connection.  
Normally in this configuration, you must set the audio  
equipments input selector to the setting that specifies the  
terminal (such as AUX IN) that the keyboard is connected to.  
Use the keyboards VOLUME knob to adjust the volume level.  
735A-E-021A  
E-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Connection Example  
• WK-3000  
PIN plug (red)  
PIN jack  
Phones/Output Terminal  
To keyboards  
PHONES/OUTPUT  
terminal  
INPUT 1  
INPUT 2  
Before connecting phones or other external equipment, be  
sure to first turn down the volume settings of the keyboard  
and the connected equipment. You can then adjust volume  
to the desired level after connections are complete.  
Stereo standard plug  
PIN plug (white)  
Keyboard or  
guitar amp  
Standard plug  
[Front]  
NOTE  
PHONES/OUTPUT Terminal  
Audio connection  
You can also connect the keyboard to a computer or  
sequencer. See MIDIon page E-89 for details.  
1
Stereo standard  
plug  
3
Keyboard amp,  
guitar amp, etc.  
White  
Red PIN plug  
2
LEFT RIGHT  
AUX IN or similar terminal  
of audio amplifier  
1
Connecting Phones  
Connecting phones cuts off output from the keyboards built-  
in speakers, so you can play even late at night without  
disturbing anyone.  
2
Audio Equipment  
Connect the keyboard to a au d io equ ip m ent u sing a  
commercially available connecting cord with a standard plug  
on one end and two PIN plugs on the other end. Note that  
the standard plug you connect to the keyboard must be a  
stereo plug, otherwise you will be able to output only one of  
stereo channels. In this configuration, you normally set the  
input selector of the audio equipment to the terminal (usually  
marked AUX IN or something similar) where the cord from  
the keyboard is connected. See the user documentation that  
comes with your audio equipment for full details.  
3
Musical Instrument Amplifier  
Use a commercially available connecting cord to connect the  
keyboard to a musical instrument amplifier.  
NOTE  
Be sure to use a connecting cord that has a stereo standard  
plug on the end you connect to the keyboard, and a  
connector that provides dual channel (left and right) input  
to the amplifier to which you are connecting. The wrong  
type of connector at either end can cause one of the stereo  
channels to be lost.  
When connected to a musical instrument amplifier, set the  
volume of the keyboard to a relatively low level and make  
output volume adjustments using the amplifiers controls.  
E-20  
735A-E-022A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Sustain/Assignable jack Terminal  
You can connect an optional sustain pedal (SP-2 or SP-20) to  
the SUSTAIN/ ASSIGNABLE JACK terminal to enable the  
capabilities described below.  
For details on how to select the pedal function you want, see  
Changing Other Settingson page E-79.  
SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK Terminal  
MIDI  
SUSTAIN/  
R
L/MONO  
ASSIGNABLE JACK  
LINE OUT  
DC 12V  
OUT  
IN  
SP-20  
Sustain Pedal  
With piano tones, depressing the pedal causes notes to  
linger, much like a pianos damper pedal.  
With organ tones, depressing the pedal causes notes to  
continue to sound until the pedal is released.  
Sostenuto Pedal  
As w ith the sustain ped al function d escribed above,  
depressing the sostenuto pedal causes notes to be sustained.  
This difference between a sostenuto 0and sustain pedal is  
the timing. With a sostenuto pedal, you press the keys and  
then depress the pedal before you release the keys. Only  
the notes that are sounding when the pedal is depressed  
are sustained.  
Soft Pedal  
Depressing the pedal softens the sound of the notes being  
played.  
Rhythm Start/Stop Pedal  
In this case, the pedal performs the same functions as the  
START/ STOP button.  
Accessories and Options  
Use only the accessories and options specified for this  
keyboard. Use of non-authorized items creates the danger of  
fire, electrical shock, and personal injury.  
735A-E-023A  
E-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
POWER  
TONE  
Number buttons  
VOLUME  
This section provid es information on performing basic  
keyboard operations.  
Drawbar Organ Tones: 50 Preset Tones + 100 User Tones  
Number  
of Tones  
DSP Line  
On/Off*1  
Number  
Tone Type  
000 - 049  
100 - 199  
50  
Preset Tones  
User Tones*6  
On/ Off*5  
To play the keyboard  
100  
On/ Off*3  
1 Press the POWER button to turn the keyboard on.  
*1: See Changing Tones and Configu ring DSP Effect  
Settingson page E-23.  
*2: Memory area for tones created by you. See Synthesizer  
Modeon page E-51. User tone areas 600 through 699  
initially contain the same data as DSP types 000 through  
099.  
*3: Depends on source tone or user setting. See Synthesizer  
Modeon page E-51 for more information.  
*4: Area for data transferred from a computer. See Using  
the Data Downloard Serviceon page E-91 for more  
information. For information about w aveforms, see  
Creating a User Toneon page E-54.  
*5: Depends on tone. This status can be checked by viewing  
the DSP button. See About the DSP Buttonon page E-  
34 for more information.  
*6: Memory area for tones created by you. See To edit a  
drawbar organ toneon page E-28. User drawbar organ  
tone areas initially contain two sets of the same data as  
drawbar organ tones types 000 through 049.  
2 Use the VOLUME knob to set the volume to a  
relatively low level.  
3 Play something on the keyboard.  
Selecting a Tone  
This keyboard comes with tones built-in, as shown below.  
A partial list of the available tone names is printed on the  
keyboard console. See the Tone Liston page A-1 of this  
manual for a complete list. Advanced Tones, are variations  
of standard tones, which are created by programming in  
effects (DSP) and other settings.  
For d etails about d raw bar organ tones, see Using the  
Drawbar Organ Modeon page E-26.  
NOTE  
Tone Types  
You cannot select tone numbers not included in the  
above range (standard tones 516 through 599 and 720  
through 799, and drawbar organ tones from 050 to 099).  
When you use the [+] and [] buttons to scroll through  
tone numbers, scrolling jumps across the unused  
numbers. Pressing [+] when 515 is selected, for  
example, jumps to 600.  
Standard Tones: 516 Preset Tones + 124 User Tones  
Number  
of Tones  
DSP Line  
On/Off*1  
Number  
Tone Type  
000 - 299  
300 - 499  
500 - 515  
600 - 699  
700 - 719  
300  
200  
16  
Advanced Tones  
Preset Tones  
On  
Off  
Drum Sets  
Off  
100  
20  
User Tones*2  
On/ Off*3  
On/ Off*3  
User Tones with Waves*4  
User Drum Sets with  
Waves*4  
800 - 803  
4
On/ Off*5  
E-22  
735A-E-024A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Digital Sampling  
To select a tone  
A number of the tones that are available with this keyboard  
have been recorded and processed using a technique called  
digital sampling. To ensure a high level of tonal quality,  
samples are taken in the low, mid, and high ranges and then  
combined to provide you with sounds that are amazingly  
close to the originals. You may notice very slight differences  
in volume or sound quality for some tones when you play  
them at different positions on the keyboard. This is an  
unavoidable result of multiple sampling, and it is not a sign  
of malfunction.  
1 Find the tone you want to use in the tone list and  
note its tone number.  
2 Press the TONE button.  
3 Use the number buttons to input the three digit tone  
Changing Tones and Configuring  
DSP Effect Settings  
This keyboard has only a single DSP sound source. Because  
of this, selecting tones for which DSP is enabled for multiple  
parts when layering or splitting tones (page E-74, 75) can  
cause conflicts. To avoid conflicts, DSP is allocated to the last  
DSP enabled tone, and DSP is disabled (DSP line OFF) for all  
other parts.  
DSP line is a parameter that controls whether or not the  
currently selected DSP effect is applied to a part.* Each tone  
has a DSP line parameter. Selecting a tone for a part applies  
the tones DSP line parameter setting to all parts.  
* The DSP line parameter is turned on (DSP effect is applied)  
for the 300 Advanced Tones numbered 000 through 299,  
and turned off (DSP effect not applied) for the 200 preset  
tones from 300 to 499. For information about other tones,  
see Tone Typeson page E-22.  
number for the tone you want to select.  
Example: To select 332 ACOUSTIC BASS GM, input  
3, 3 and then 2.  
_
A c o . B s G  
NOTE  
Always input all three digits for the tone number, including  
leading zeros (if any).  
You can also increment the displayed tone number by  
pressing [+] and decrement it by pressing [].  
When one of the drum sets is selected (tone numbers  
500 through 515), each keyboard key is assigned a  
different percussion sound. See page A-12 for details.  
Polyphony  
The term polyphony refers to the maximum number of notes  
you can play at the same time. The keyboard has 32-note  
polyphony, which includes the notes you play as well as the  
rhythms and auto-accompaniment patterns that are played  
by the keyboard. This means that when a rhythm or auto-  
accompaniment pattern is being played by the keyboard, the  
number of notes (polyphony) available for keyboard play is  
reduced. Also note that some of the tones offer only 10-note  
polyphony.  
735A-E-025A  
E-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
PIANO SETTING  
WK-3500  
WK-3000  
MODULATION button  
PITCH BEND wheel  
MODULATION wheel  
PITCH BEND wheel  
NOTE  
PIANO SETTING Button  
Pressing the PIANO SETTING button while a rhythm is  
playing stops rhythm play and then changes the  
keyboard setup.  
Pressing this button changes the setup of the keyboard to  
optimize it for piano play.  
Pressing the PIANO SETTING button while the keyboard  
is in the Synthesizer Mode or other mode exits the  
current mode and then changes the keyboard setup.  
The setup of the keyboard does not change if you press  
the PIANO SETTING button when any one of the  
following exists.  
* During real-time recording, step recording, or while  
using the editing function of the Song Memory  
* While the data save or overwrite message is on the  
display  
Settings  
Tone Number: 000 St.GrPno”  
Rhythm Number: 120 Pf Bld 1”  
Accompaniment Mode: Normal  
Layer: Off  
Split: Off  
Auto Harmonize: Off  
Transpose: 0  
Touch Response:  
Off: Returns to initial default  
On: No change  
* During a registration data save operation  
Assignable Jack: SUS  
Local Control: On  
Mixer Channel 1 Parameter Setup: Depends on tone  
To optimize keyboard settings for  
piano play  
1 Press the PIANO SETTING button.  
2 Now try playing something on the keyboard.  
The notes you play will sound with a piano tone.  
If you want to play with rhythm accompaniment,  
press the START/ STOP button. This causes a rhythm  
that is optimized for piano will start to play.  
To stop rhythm play, press the START/ STOP button  
again.  
E-24  
735A-E-026A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Using the PITCH BEND Wheel  
Using the MODULATION  
As its name suggests, the PITCH BEND wheel lets you bend”  
the pitch of a sound. This makes it possible to add a touch of  
realism to saxophone and other tones.  
Modulation applies vibrato, which modulates the pitch of a  
note. It works best with notes that are sustained (held) by  
keeping a keyboard key held down, especially when playing  
the melody with a violin or other similar tone.  
You can modify the modulation effect using DSP parameter  
0 through 7. For more information, see DSP Parameterson  
page E-33.  
To use the PITCH BEND wheel  
1 While holding down a keyboard key with your right  
hand, use your left hand to rotate the PITCH BEND  
wheel up and down.  
WK-3500  
Releasing the PITCH BEND wheel returns the note  
to its original pitch.  
To use the MODULATION Wheel  
1 While playing melody notes with your right hand,  
NOTE  
rotate the MODULATION wheel with your left to  
With saxophone and electrical guitar tones, the most  
realistic sounding effects can be produced if you play  
notes and operate the PITCH BEND wheel  
simultaneously.  
See Pitch Bend Range (Initial Default: 12)on page E-  
82 for changing the bend range of the PITCH BEND  
wheel.  
apply vibrato to the notes.  
The amount of vibrato applied depends on how far  
you rotate the MODULATION w heel u p w ard s.  
Setting the wheel to its neutral position (rotated as  
far downwards as it can go) turns vibrato off.  
Never turn on keyboard power while the PITCH BEND  
wheel is rotated.  
WK-3000  
To use the MODULATION button  
1 While holding down a keyboard key with your right  
hand, use your left hand to press the  
MODULATION button.  
Vibrato is applied as long as the MODULATION  
button is depressed.  
NOTE  
Modulation can be used to add greater expression to  
sustained melody notes being played using a violin,  
synthetic reed, or other similar tone.  
Modulation affects different tones in different ways.  
735A-E-027A  
E-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Drawbar Organ Mode  
Your keyboard has built-in drawbar organ tonesthat can be altered using nine digital drawbars whose operations are similar to  
the controls on a drawbar organ. You can also select percussion or key click. There is room in memory for storage of up to 100  
user-created drawbar tone variations.  
Drawbar Organ Mode Operational Flow  
Tone/Rhythm Selection Screeen  
*
DRAWBAR ORGAN button  
EXIT button  
Drawbar Organ Tone Selection Screen  
[̈] CURSOR button  
DRAWBAR ORGAN button  
Drawbar Organ Tone Editing Screen  
[
] / [ ] CURSOR buttons  
̈
[
] / [ ] CURSOR buttons  
̇
̇
̈
More?Screen  
[̄] CURSOR button  
[̆] CURSOR button  
Synthesizer Editing Screen  
[̄] CURSOR button  
[̆] CURSOR button  
DSP Effect Editing Screen  
[̄] CURSOR button  
[̆] CURSOR button  
Name/Save Setting Screen  
* You can also display the drawbar organ tone selection screen from the Song Memory Mode or SMF Playback Mode screen. In  
this case, however, the Drawbar Organ Tone Editing Screen does not appear.  
E-26  
735A-E-028A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Drawbar Organ Mode  
Channel Buttons while the Drawbar Organ Tone Selection Screen is Displayed  
The 18 buttons along the bottom of the display function as drawbar buttons while the drawbar organ tone selection screen is on  
the display (after you press the DRAWBAR ORGAN button). Each pair of buttons (upper and lower) represents a drawbar, which  
means that the 18 buttons provide you with the function of nine drawbars.  
: Feet  
Value  
Parameter Name  
F t 1 6 ’  
Currently selected  
parameter  
16 51/3  
8
4
22/3  
2
13/5 11/3  
1
CLICK SECOND THIRD DECAY  
PERCUSSION  
Decrease  
Currently selected drawbar  
Increase  
Drawbar buttons  
Each of the nine button pairs is assigned values ranging from 16 feet to 1 foot. Each button pair has a decrease button (for  
decreasing by 16 feet, 5-1/ 3 feet, etc.) and an increase button (for increasing by 16 feet, 5-1/ 3 feet, etc.).  
735A-E-029A  
E-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Drawbar Organ Mode  
DRAWBAR ORGAN  
Number buttons  
[+] []  
/
CURSOR  
To select a drawbar organ tone  
Parameter Setting  
Parameter Name  
1 Find the drawbar organ tone you want to use in  
F t 1 6 ’  
the tone list and note its tone number.  
2 Press the DRAWBAR ORGAN button.  
This causes the drawbar organ tone selection screen  
to appear.  
Tone Number  
Tone Name  
There are a total of 13 parameters. You can use the  
[̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to cycle through them.  
See Param eter Detailson page E-29 for m ore  
information.  
g
Ro c kO r 1  
While the More?screen is on the display, you can  
advance to the synthesizer and DSP effect editing  
screens by pressing the [̄] CURSOR button or the  
[+] button.  
3 Use the [̆] and [̄] CURSOR buttons or the [+]  
3 Use the number buttons to input the three digit tone  
and [–] buttons to change the setting of the currently  
number for the tone you want to select.  
displayed parameter.  
You can also change a parameter setting by entering  
a value with the number buttons.  
You can monitor the changes in a tone by playing  
notes on the keyboard as you ad just param eter  
settings.  
NOTE  
Always input all three digits for the tone number,  
including leading zeros (if any).  
You can also increment the displayed tone number by  
pressing [+] and decrement it by pressing [].  
NOTE  
Selecting a different tone after you edit parameters  
replaces parameter settings with those of the newly  
selected tone.  
To edit a drawbar organ tone  
If you have drawbar organ tones assigned to more than  
one channel, changing the drawbar organ setting for one  
of the channels causes the same setting to be applied  
to all of the other channels as well.  
1 Select the drawbar organ tone (000 to 049, 100 to  
199) you want to edit.  
See To save an edited drawbar organ toneon page E-  
30 for information about saving your edits.  
2 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to display  
the drawbar organ tone editing screen. Select the  
parameter whose setting you want to change.  
Example: Selecting the Ft16parameter  
E-28  
735A-E-030A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Drawbar Organ Mode  
Editing Synthesizer Mode Parameters  
and DSP Parameters of Drawbar Tones  
As with standard (non-drawbar) tones, you can edit the  
Synthesizer Mod e p aram eters and DSP p aram eters of  
drawbar organ tones. See Drawbar Organ Mode Operational  
Flowon page E-26.  
Percussion  
This param eter lets you ad d percu ssion sou nd , w hich  
provides modulation to sustained tones that you create. When  
you hold down a key on the keyboard, the sound produced  
decays until it is no longer audible. Pressing the key gain  
sounds the note again at a louder volume. Percussion has  
2nd Percussion(2nd overtone pitch) and 3rd Percussion”  
(3rd overtone pitch) settings, each of which can be turned on  
or off.  
1 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to display  
More?, and then press the [̄] CURSOR button.  
This enters the Synthesizer Mode, which is indicated  
by the indicator next to SYNTH on the display screen.  
For the remainder of this procedure, perform the steps  
starting from step 3 under Creating a User Toneon  
page E-54.  
You can also specify the percussion decay time, which controls  
how long it takes for the percussion sound to decay.  
Parameter Display  
Parameter Name  
2nd Percussion  
3rd Percussion  
Settings  
Indication  
oFF  
on  
Click Off  
....  
Second  
Click On  
.......  
Parameter Details  
The following provides details about the parameters you can  
oFF  
on  
Off  
On  
....  
.......  
Third  
configure using the drawbar organ tone editing screen.  
Percussion  
Decay Time  
Decay  
000 to 127  
Drawbar Position  
This parameter defines the position of each drawbar, and the  
volume of each overtone. The larger the value, the greater  
the corresponding overtones volume.  
Parameter Display  
Parameter Name  
Settings  
0 to 3  
Indication  
Drawbar 16’  
Drawbar 5 1/ 3’  
Drawbar 8’  
Ft 16’  
Ft 5 1/ 3’  
Ft 8’  
0 to 3  
0 to 3  
0 to 3  
0 to 3  
0 to 3  
0 to 3  
0 to 3  
0 to 3  
Drawbar 4’  
Ft 4’  
Drawbar 2 2/ 3’  
Drawbar 2’  
Ft 2 2/ 3’  
Ft 2’  
Drawbar 1 3/ 5’  
Drawbar 1 1/ 3’  
Drawbar 1’  
Ft 1 3/ 5’  
Ft 1 1/ 3’  
Ft 1’  
(Ft: Feet)  
Click  
The parameter determines whether or not a key click is added  
when a sustained tone configured using the drawbars is  
played.  
Parameter Display  
Parameter Name  
Settings  
Indication  
oFF  
Click Off  
Click On  
....  
Click  
Click  
on  
.......  
735A-E-031A  
E-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Drawbar Organ Mode  
[+] []  
/
CURSOR  
Display Contents in the Drawbar Organ Mode  
To save an edited drawbar organ  
tone  
In the Drawbar Organ Mode, the current status of the drawbar  
positions, key click, and percussion parameters are indicated  
on the displays bar graph as shown in the illustrations below.  
There is one line for each parameter, and the bottom segment  
of the selected parameter line flashes.  
The bottom segment of the bar graph column that represents  
the currently selected parameter flashes to indicate that it is  
selected.  
1 After editing parameters, use the [̇] and [̈]  
CURSOR buttons to display More?.  
2 Press the [̄] CURSOR button three times to display  
the screen for inputting a tone name and assigning  
a tone number.  
None of the channel numbers (1 to 16) are displayed in the  
drawbar organ tone mode and editing mode.  
3 Use the [+] and [] buttons to select a tone number.  
You can select a tone number in the range of 100 to  
199.  
Drawbar Position Graph  
Setting Value  
0
1
2
3
4 After the tone name is the way you want, press the  
Display  
[̈] CURSOR button to store the tone.  
Use the [+] and [] buttons to scroll through letters at  
the current cursor location.  
Off  
On  
Blink  
Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to move the  
cursor left and right.  
Click and Percussion On/Off Graph  
See the page E-103 for information about inputting  
text.  
Setting Value  
Off  
On  
5 After everything is the way you want, press the [̄]  
Display  
CURSOR button to store the tone.  
This will display a confirmation message asking  
whether you really want to save the data. Press the  
YES button to save the data.  
Percussion Decay Time Graph  
Setting Value  
0-31  
32-63  
64-95  
96-127  
After the save operation is complete, the message  
Completeappears and then the display returns to  
the tone selection or rhythm selection screen.  
To cancel save, press the EXIT button.  
Display  
E-30  
735A-E-032A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Applying Effects to Tones  
This keyboard provides you with a selection of effects that  
DSP  
you can apply to tones.  
The built-in effects include a wide variety of variations that  
give you access to a selection of general digital effects.  
DSP effects are applied to the connection between the sound  
source and output. You can select distortion and modulation  
effects. You can create DSP effect setups and also transfer  
downloaded DSP data from your computer. The keyboard  
has memory that lets you store up to 100 DSP effect setups.  
See Using the Data Download Serviceon page E-91 and  
Saving the Settings of DSP Parameterson page E-33 for  
more information.  
Effect Blocks  
The following shows how the effects of this keyboard are  
organized.  
REVERB  
REVERB  
DSP button  
Reverb sim u lates th e acou stics of sp ecific typ es of  
environments. You can choose from among 16 different reverb  
effects, including Roomand Hall.  
CHORUS  
Sound Source  
16ch  
EQUALIZER  
Output  
off  
on  
DSP  
DSP Line  
CHORUS  
The chorus effect gives sound greater depth by causing it to  
vibrate. You can choose from among 16 different chorus  
effects, including Chorusand Flanger.  
EQUALIZER  
The equalizer is another type of effect that you can use to  
make adjustments in tone quality. Frequencies are divided  
among a number of bands, and raising and lowering the level  
of each frequency band alters the sound.  
You can reproduce the optimal acoustics for the type of music  
you are playing (classics, for example) by selecting the  
applicable equalizer setting.  
Channel Buttons while the Effect Mode Screen is Displayed  
In the Effect Mode, the 18 buttons along the bottom of the display screen control the type and parameters of each effect, a shown  
in the illustration below.  
Effect type  
Parameter 1 Parameter 3 Parameter 5 Parameter 7  
Parameter 0 Parameter 2 Parameter 4 Parameter 6  
16 51/3  
8
4
22/3  
2
13/5 11/3  
1
Decrease  
Currently selected drawbar  
Increase  
CHANNEL buttons  
NOTE  
Pressing the [̆] and [̄] CURSOR buttons at the same time returns the currently selected effect to its preset value.  
735A-E-033A  
E-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Applying Effects to Tones  
EFFECT  
CURSOR  
Number buttons  
[+] []  
/
EXIT  
Selecting a DSP Type  
Changing the Settings of DSP  
Parameters  
You can control the relative strength of a DSP and how it is  
applied. See the following section titled DSP Parameters”  
for more information.  
In addition to the 100 built-in effect types, you can also edit  
effect types to create your own and store them in user  
memory. You can have up to 100 effect types in user memory  
at one time. You can also select the DSP type of the last DSP  
enabled tone that you used. This means you always have  
access to the DSP type of Advanced Tones and tones you  
download over the Internet. To select the DSP type of the last  
DSP enabled tone that you used, select tonin step 3 of the  
procedure below.  
1 After selecting the DSP type you want, use the [̇]  
and [̈] CURSOR buttons to display the parameter  
whose setting you want to change.  
This displays the parameter setting screen.  
Perform the following steps to select a DSP type.  
2 Use the [+] and [] buttons or the number buttons  
PREPARATION  
to make the parameter setting you want.  
When using a DSP effect, you should use the Mixer to  
confirm that the DSP lines of the required parts are  
turned on. See Mixer Functionon page E-47 for more  
information.  
Pressing the [+] and [] buttons at the same time  
returns the parameter to its recommended setting.  
3 Press the EFFECT or EXIT button.  
This exits the tone or rhythm setting screen.  
1 Press the EFFECT button so the pointer appears next  
to EFFECT on the display.  
2 Press the [̈] CURSOR button.  
The DSP type setting screen will appear automatically  
about fives seconds after you press the button.  
3 Use the [+] and [] buttons or number buttons to  
select the type of DSP you want.  
See the Effect Liston page A-17 for information  
about the DSP types that can be selected.  
Here you could also change the parameters of the  
effect you selected, if you want. See Changing the  
Settings of DSP Parametersfor more information.  
NOTE  
The DSP type display area shows the DSP number (000  
to 199), or ton(user tone created using DSP).  
E-32  
735A-E-034A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Applying Effects to Tones  
Saving the Settings of DSP  
Parameters  
DSP Parameters  
The following describes the parameters for each DSP.  
You can save up to 100 modified DSPs in the user area for  
later recall when you need them.  
DSP  
Parameter 0 to 7  
NOTE  
These parameters differ in accordance with the algorithm*  
of the selected DSP type. See the Effect Liston page A-  
17 and the DSP Algorithm Liston page A-19 for more  
information.  
User DSP areas 100 through 199 initially contain the  
same data as DSP types 000 through 099.  
* Effector structure and operation type  
1 After making the DSP parameter settings you want,  
DSP Reverb Send (Range: 000 to 127)  
press the [̄] CURSOR button.  
This causes the DSP number of the user area where  
the DSP will be saved to flash on the display.  
Specifies how much of the post-DSP sound should be sent  
to reverb.  
2 Use the [+] and [] buttons to select the user area  
DSP Chorus Send (Range: 000 to 127)  
DSP number where you want to save the new DSP.  
You can select a user area DSP number in the range of  
100 to 199 only.  
Specifies how much of the post-DSP sound should be sent  
to chorus.  
NOTE  
3 After the user DSP area number you want is  
Whether or not an effect is applied to the parts that are  
sounding also depends on Mixer Mode Reverb Send,  
Chorus Send, and DSP on/off settings. See Mixer  
Functionon page E-47 for more information.  
Playing a demo tune (page E-12) automatically changes  
the effect to the one that is assigned to the tune. You  
cannot change or cancel a demo tune effect.  
Changing the effect setting while sound is being output  
by the keyboard causes a slight break in the sound when  
the effect changes.  
A number of tones, called Advanced Tones,  
automatically turn on the DSP line for richer, higher  
quality sound. If you assign an Advanced Tone to a  
keyboard part (Channels 1 through 4), the DSP line turns  
on automatically and the DSP selection changes in  
accordance with the settings of theAdvanced Tone. Also,  
the Mixer Mode DSP line on/off setting for the keyboard  
part to which the Advanced Tone is assigned is turned  
on.*  
selected, press the [̈] CURSOR button.  
Use the [+] and [] buttons to scroll through letters at  
the current cursor location.  
Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to move the  
cursor left and right.  
See the page E-103 for information about inputting  
text.  
4 After everything is the way you want, press the [̄]  
CURSOR button to store the effect.  
This will display a confirmation message asking  
whether you really want to save the data. Press the  
YES button to save the data.  
The message Completeappears momentarily on the  
display, followed by the tone or rhythm selection  
screen.  
* The Mixer DSP line setting is automatically turned off  
for each part that does not have an Advanced Tone  
assigned.  
Because of this, DSP effects previously applied to  
these parts are cancelled, which can make their tone  
sound different. In this case, display the Mixer screen  
and turn DSP back on.  
735A-E-035A  
E-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Applying Effects to Tones  
EFFECT  
DSP  
CURSOR  
Number buttons  
[+] []  
/
EXIT  
About the DSP Button  
Selecting REVERB  
Checking the DSP button will tell you whether or not whether  
DSP is enabled for the tone that is currently selected for a  
part. The DSP button will be lit for a tone that is DSP enabled  
(DSP line ON), and unlit for a tone that is DSP disabled (DSP  
line OFF). For example, when you move each part while suing  
the split/ layer function, the DSP button lights or goes out in  
accordance with that parts setting.  
Perform the following steps to select REVERB.  
1 Press the EFFECT button, so the pointer appears  
next to EFFECT on the display screen.  
Pressing the DSP button toggles the tone of the part you are  
currently playing on the keyboard between enabled (DSP line  
ON) and disabled (DSP line OFF).  
To turn DSP line on and off  
Pointer  
1 Press the DSP button to toggle DSP line for the  
2 Press the [̄] CURSOR button once.  
currently selected part on and off.  
This displays the reverb editing screen.  
3 Press the [̈] CURSOR button.  
Th e reverb typ e settin g screen w ill ap p ear  
automatically about fives seconds after you press the  
button.  
4 Use the [+] and [] buttons or the number buttons  
to scroll through the reverb types until the one you  
want is displayed, or use the number buttons to  
input the reverb number you want to select.  
See the list on page A-17 for information about the  
types of REVERB effects that are available.  
Here you could also change the parameters of the  
effect you selected, if you want. See Changing the  
Settin gs of REVERB Param etersfor m ore  
information.  
E-34  
735A-E-036A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Applying Effects to Tones  
Changing the Settings of REVERB  
Parameters  
You can control the relative strength of a reverb and how it is  
ap p lied . See th e follow in g section titled REVERB  
Parametersfor more information.  
REVERB Parameters  
Reverb effects are associated with either a reverb type or delay  
type. Parameter settings depend upon the associated type.  
Reverb Type (No. 0 to 5, 8 to 13)  
Reverb Level (Range: 000 to 127)  
1 After selecting the reverb type you want, use the  
Controls the reverb size. A larger number produces larger  
reverb.  
[̇] and [̈] CURSO R buttons to display the  
parameter whose setting you want to change.  
This displays the parameter setting screen.  
Example: To set the Reverb Time parameter  
Reverb Time (Range: 000 to 127)  
Controls how long reverb continues. A larger number  
produces longer reverb.  
ER Level (Initial Echo Sound) (Range: 000 to 127)  
SR v T i me  
This parameter controls the initial reverb volume. The  
initial echo sound is the first sound reflected from the  
walls and ceiling when a sound is output by this keyboard.  
A larger value specifies a larger echo sound.  
2 Use the [+] and [] buttons or the number buttons  
to input the parameter setting you want.  
3 Press the EFFECT or EXIT button.  
High Damp (Range: 000 to 127)  
This returns to the tone or rhythm selection screen.  
Adjusts the damping of high frequency reverberation  
(high sound ). A sm aller value d am ps high sound s,  
creating a dark reverb. A larger value does not damp high  
sounds, for a brighter reverb.  
Delay Type (No. 6, 7, 14, 15)  
Delay Level (Range: 000 to 127)  
Specifies the size of the delay sound. A higher value  
produces a larger delay sound.  
Delay Feedback (Range: 000 to 127)  
Adjusts delay repeat. A higher value produces a greater  
number of repeats.  
ER Level  
Same as Reverb Type  
High Damp  
Same as Reverb Type  
NOTE  
Whether or not an effect is applied to the parts that are  
sounding also depends on Mixer Mode Reverb Send,  
Chorus Send, and DSP on/off settings. See Mixer  
Functionon page E-47 for more information.  
735A-E-037A  
E-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Applying Effects to Tones  
EFFECT  
CURSOR  
Number buttons  
[+] []  
/
EXIT  
Selecting CHORUS  
Perform the following steps to select CHORUS.  
Changing the Settings of CHORUS  
Parameters  
You can control the relative strength of an effect and how it is  
applied. The parameters you can control depend on the effect.  
See the following section titled CHORUS Parametersfor  
more information.  
1 Press the EFFECT button, so the pointer appears  
next to EFFECT on the display screen.  
2 Press the [̄] CURSOR button twice.  
1 After selecting the chorus type you want, use the  
This displays the chorus editing screen.  
[̇] and [̈] CURSO R buttons to display the  
3 Press the [̈] CURSOR button.  
Th e ch oru s typ e settin g screen w ill ap p ear  
automatically about fives seconds after you press the  
button.  
parameter whose setting you want to change.  
This displays the parameter setting screen.  
2 Use the [+] and [] buttons or the number buttons  
to input the parameter setting you want.  
4 Use the [+] and [] buttons or the number buttons  
to scroll through the chorus types until the one you  
want is displayed, or use the number buttons to  
3 Press the EFFECT or EXIT button.  
This returns to the tone or rhythm selection screen.  
input the chorus number you want to select.  
See the list on page A-17 for information about the  
types of CHORUS effects that are available.  
Here you could also change the parameters of the  
effect you selected, if you want. See Changing the  
Settin gs of CH ORUS Param etersfor m ore  
information.  
CHORUS Parameters  
Chorus Level (Range: 000 to 127)  
Specifies the size of the chorus sound.  
Chorus Rate (Range: 000 to 127)  
Specifies the undulation speed of the chorus sound. A  
higher value produces faster undulation.  
Chorus Depth (Range: 000 to 127)  
Specifies the undulation depth of the chorus sound. A  
higher value produces deeper undulation.  
NOTE  
Whether or not an effect is applied to the parts that are  
sounding also depends on Mixer Mode Reverb Send,  
Chorus Send, and DSP on/off settings. See Mixer  
Functionon page E-47 for more information.  
E-36  
735A-E-038A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Applying Effects to Tones  
Using the Equalizer  
To adjust the gain (volume) of a band  
This keyboard has a built-in four-band equalizer and 10  
different settings from which you can choose. You can adjust  
the gain (volume) of all four equalizer bands within the range  
of 12 to 0 to +12.  
1 After selecting the equalizer type you want, use  
the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to select the band  
whose gain you want to adjust.  
Example: To adjust the HIGH band  
To select the equalizer type  
q
g
ME H i h  
1 Press the EFFECT button, so the pointer appears  
next to EFFECT on the display screen.  
2 Use the [+] and [] buttons or the number buttons  
2 Press the [̄] CURSOR button three times.  
to adjust the band gain.  
This displays the equalizer editing screen.  
Example: To adjust the gain to 10  
3 Press the [̈] CURSOR button.  
Th e equ alizer typ e settin g screen w ill ap p ear  
automatically about fives seconds after you press the  
button.  
q
g
ME H i h  
Pressing the EXIT or EFFECT bu tton exits the  
4 Use the [+] and [] buttons or the number buttons  
equalizer setting screen.  
to select the equalizer type you want.  
See the list on page A-17 for information about the  
equalizer types that are available.  
NOTE  
Changing to another equalizer type causes the band  
gain settings to change to the initial settings for the newly  
selected equalizer type automatically.  
Example: To select Jazz  
J a z z  
Pressing the EXIT or EFFECT bu tton exits the  
equalizer setting screen.  
735A-E-039A  
E-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Accompaniment  
RHYTHM  
Number buttons  
VARIATION/FILL-IN 1/2  
TEMPO  
This keyboard automatically plays bass and chord parts in  
accordance with the chords you finger. The bass and chord  
p arts are p layed u sin g sou n d s an d ton es th at are  
automatically selected to select the rhythm you are using.  
All of this means that you get full, realistic accompaniments  
for the melody notes you play with your right hand, creating  
the mood of a one-person ensemble.  
About the MODE Button  
Use the MODE button to select the accompaniment mode you  
want to use. Each press of the MODE button cycles through  
the available accom p anim ent m od es as show n in the  
illustration below.  
Auto Accompaniment off  
FULL RANGE CHORD  
FINGERED  
CASIO CHORD  
On ly rh yth m sou n d s are p rod u ced w h en all  
accompaniment mode lamps are off.  
The currently selected accompaniment mode is shown by  
the mode lamps above the MODE button. Information on  
using each of these modes starts from page E-40.  
E-38  
735A-E-040A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Accompaniment  
Selecting a Rhythm  
Playing a Rhythm  
This keyboard provides you with 140 exciting rhythms that  
you can select using the following procedure.  
To play a rhythm  
You can also transfer accom p anim ent d ata from you r  
computer and store up to 16 of them as user rhythms in  
keyboard memory. See Using the Data Download Service”  
on page E-91 for more information.  
1 Press VARIATION/FILL-IN button 1 or 2.  
This starts the play of the selected rhythm.  
To stop rhythm play, press the START/ STOP button.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
Chords will sound along with the rhythm if any of the  
three accompaniment mode lamps above the MODE  
button is lit. If you want to play the rhythm pattern without  
chords, press the MODE button until all of the lamps  
are off.  
Initially, nothing is stored in the user rhythm memory  
area.  
To select a rhythm  
1 Find the rhythm you want to use in the rhythm list  
Adjusting the Tempo  
You can adjust the tempo of rhythm play within a range of 30 to  
255 beats per minute. The tempo setting is used for Auto  
Accompaniment chord play, and song memory operations.  
and note its rhythm number.  
2 Press the RHYTHM button.  
Not all of the available rhythms are shown on the  
rhythm list printed on the keyboard console. For a  
complete list, see the Rhythm Liston page A-14.  
To adjust the tempo  
Number and name of selected rhythm  
1 Press one of the TEMPO buttons (̆ or ̄).  
̆ : Increments displayed value (increases tempo)  
̄ : Decrements displayed value (decreases tempo)  
8 B e a t 1  
Appears when RHYTHM button is pressed  
3 Use the number buttons to input the three digit  
rhythm number for the rhythm you want to select.  
NOTE  
Example: To select 041 ROCK 2, input 0, 4 and then 1.  
Pressing both TEMPO buttons (̆ and ̄) at the same  
time resets the tempo to the default value of the currently  
selected rhythm.  
Ro c k 2  
NOTE  
You can also increment the displayed rhythm number  
by pressing [+] and decrement it by pressing [].  
735A-E-041A  
E-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Accompaniment  
MODE  
START/STOP  
Using Auto Accompaniment  
CASIO CHORD  
This method of chord play makes it possible for anyone to  
easily play chords, regardless of previous musical knowledge  
and experience. The following describes the CASIO CHORD  
accompaniment keyboardand melody keyboard, and  
tells you how to play CASIO CHORDs.  
The following procedure describes how to use the keyboards  
Auto Accompaniment feature. Before starting, you should  
first select the rhythm you want to use and set the tempo of  
the rhythm to the value you want.  
To use Auto Accompaniment  
CASIO CHORD Accompaniment Keyboard and Melody  
Keyboard  
1 Use the MODE button to select CASIO CHORD,  
Accompaniment  
FINGERED, or FULL RANGE CHO RD as the  
keyboard  
Melody keyboard  
accompaniment mode.  
The currently selected accompaniment mode is the  
one whose lamp is lit. See About the MODE Button”  
on page E-38 for details.  
NOTE  
2 Press the START/STOP button to start play of the  
The accompaniment keyboard can be used for playing  
chords only. No sound will be produced if you try playing  
single melody notes on the accompaniment keyboard.  
currently selected rhythm.  
3 Play a chord.  
The actual procedure you should use to play a chord  
depends on the currently selected accompaniment  
mode. Refer to the following pages for details on  
chord play.  
CASIO CHORD .............................. This page  
FINGERED ...................................... Page E-41  
FULL RANGE CHORD ................ Page E-42  
Current measure number  
and beat number  
Chord name  
R o c k  
2
Basic fingering of current chord  
(May be different from chord actually  
being played on the keyboard.)  
4 To stop Auto Accompaniment play, press the START/  
STOP button again.  
E-40  
735A-E-042A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Accompaniment  
Chord Types  
FINGERED  
CASIO CHORD accompaniment lets you play four types of  
chords with minimal fingering.  
FINGERED provides you with a total of 15 different chord  
typ es. Th e follow in g d escribes th e FIN GERED  
accompaniment keyboardand melody keyboard, and  
tells you how to play a C-root chord using FINGERED.  
Chord Types  
Major chords  
Example  
FINGERED Accompaniment Keyboard and Melody  
Keyboard  
Major chord names are marked C Major (C)  
above the keys of the  
accompaniment keyboard.  
Note that the chord produced  
when you press an  
CC#DE E FF#GAAB B CC DE E  
F
#
Accompaniment  
keyboard  
Melody keyboard  
accompaniment keyboard does  
not change octave, regardless  
of which key you use to play it.  
Minor chords (m)  
C minor (Cm)  
NOTE  
To play a minor chord, keep  
the major chord key depressed  
and press any other  
accompaniment keyboard key  
located to the right of the  
major chord key.  
CC#DE E FF#GAAB B CC DE E  
F
#
The accompaniment keyboard can be used for playing  
chords only. No sound will be produced if you try playing  
single melody notes on the accompaniment keyboard.  
C
Cm  
Cdim  
Seventh chords (7)  
C seventh (C7)  
To play a seventh chord, keep  
the major chord key depressed  
and press any other two  
accompaniment keyboard keys  
located to the right of the  
major chord key.  
CC#DE E FF#GAAB B CC DE E  
F
#
Caug*1  
Cm7*2  
C75 *1  
Cmadd9*2  
Csus4  
Cmaj7*2  
C7sus4  
CmM7*2  
C7*2  
Minor seventh chords (m7)  
To play a minor seventh chord,  
keep the major chord key  
depressed and press any other  
three accompaniment  
C minor seventh (Cm7)  
CC#DE E FF#GAAB B CC DE E  
F
#
Cm75  
Cadd9*2  
Cdim7*1  
keyboard keys located to the  
right of the major chord key.  
NOTE  
It makes no difference whether you press black or white  
keys to the right of a major chord key when playing minor  
and seventh chords.  
See the Fingered Chord Charton page A-15 for details on  
playing chords with other roots.  
*1: Inverted fingerings cannot be used. The lowest note is  
the root.  
*2: The same chord can be played without pressing the 5th G.  
735A-E-043A  
E-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Accompaniment  
Chords Recognized by This Keyboard  
NOTE  
Except for the chords specified in note*1above, inverted  
fingerings (i.e. playing E-G-C or G-C-E instead of C-E-  
G) will produce the same chords as the standard  
fingering.  
Except for the exception specified in note*2 above, all  
of the keys that make up a chord must be pressed.  
Failure to press even a single key will not play the desired  
FINGERED chord.  
The following table identifies patterns that are recognized as  
chords by FULL RANGE CHORD.  
Pattern Type  
Number of Variations  
The 15 chord patterns shown  
under FINGERED on page E-41.  
See the Fingered Chord Charton  
page A-15 for details on playing  
chords with other roots.  
FINGERED  
23 standard chord fingerings. The  
following are examples of the 23  
chords available with C as the bass  
note.  
FULL RANGE CHORD  
This accompaniment method provides a total of 38 different  
chord types: the 15 chord types available with FINGERED  
plus 23 additional types. The keyboard interprets any input  
of three or more keys that matches a FULL RANGE CHORD  
pattern to be a chord. Any other input (that is not a FULL  
RANGE CHORD pattern) is interpreted as melody play.  
Because of this, there is no need for a separate accompaniment  
keyboard, so the entire keyboard, from end to end, functions  
as a melody keyboard that can be used for both melody and  
chords.  
C6 Cm6 C69  
Standard  
Fingerings  
C
C
D
C
E
C
F
C
G
C
A
C
B
C
B
C
C m Dm Fm Gm Am B m  
C
C
C
C
C
C
5  
Dm7 A 7  
F7 Fm7 Gm7 A add9  
C
C
C
C
C
C
FULL RANGE CHORD Accompaniment Keyboard and  
Melody Keyboard  
Example: To play the chord C major.  
Accompaniment keyboard/Melody keyboard  
Any of the fingerings shown in the illustration below will  
produce C major.  
1
E
G
C
E
G
C
1 ...... Chord C  
2
C
2 ...... Chord  
E
NOTE  
As with the FINGERED mode (page E-41), you can play  
the notes that form a chord in any combination (1).  
When the lowest note of a chord is separated from its  
neighboring note by six or more semitones, the lowest  
note becomes the bass note (2).  
E-42  
735A-E-044A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Accompaniment  
START/STOP  
INTRO/ENDING 1/2  
SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT  
Using an Intro Pattern  
To insert a fill-in  
This keyboard lets you insert a short intro into a rhythm  
1 Press the START/STOP button to start rhythm play.  
pattern to make startup smoother and more natural.  
2 Select the fill-in variation you want.  
The following procedure describes how to use the Intro  
feature. Before starting, you should first select the rhythm  
you want to use, set the tempo, and use the MODE button to  
select the chord play method you want to use (NORMAL,  
CASIO CHORD, FINGERED, FULL RANGE CHORD).  
To insert Fill-in 1, press the VARIATION/ FILL-IN 1  
button while Variation 1 of the rhythm is playing.  
To insert Fill-in 2, press the VARIATION/ FILL-IN 2  
button while Variation 2 of the rhythm is playing.  
NOTE  
To insert an intro  
Only the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button is operational  
while an intro is playing.  
Holding down the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT or  
VARIATION/FILL-IN 1/2 buttons causes the fill-in pattern  
to repeat.  
1 Press INTRO/ENDING button 1 or 2.  
With the above setup, the intro pattern is played and  
the auto accompaniment with intro pattern starts as  
soon as you play chord s on the accompaniment  
keyboard.  
NOTE  
Using a Rhythm Variation  
In addition to the standard rhythm pattern, you can also  
switch to a secondary variationrhythm pattern for a bit of  
variety .  
The standard rhythm pattern starts to play after the intro  
pattern is complete.  
Using a Fill-in Pattern  
To insert the variation rhythm pattern  
Fill-in patterns let you momentarily change the rhythm  
p attern to ad d som e in terestin g variation to you r  
performances.  
1 Press the START/STOP button to start rhythm play.  
2 Press the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button.  
If a Variation 1 rhythm is currently playing, this plays  
Fill-in 1, followed by Fill-in 2, and then switches to  
the Variation 2 rhythm.  
The following procedure describes how to use the Fill-in  
feature.  
If a Variation 2 rhythm is currently playing, this plays  
Fill-in 2, followed by Fill-in 1, and then switches to  
the Variation 1 rhythm.  
Holding down the SYNCHRO/ FILL-IN NEXT button  
causes the fill-in pattern to repeat.  
735A-E-045A  
E-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Accompaniment  
MODE  
ONE TOUCH PRESET  
INTRO/ENDING 1/2  
SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT  
AUTO HARMONIZE  
Synchro Starting Accompaniment  
with Rhythm Play  
You can set up the keyboard to start rhythm play at the same  
time you play the accompaniment on the keyboard.  
Finishing with an Ending Pattern  
You can end your performances with an ending pattern that  
brings the rhythm pattern you are using to a natural-sounding  
conclusion.  
The following procedure describes how to insert an ending  
pattern. Note that the actual ending pattern played depends  
on the rhythm pattern you are using.  
The following procedure describes how to use synchro start.  
Before starting, you should first select the rhythm you want  
to use, set the tempo, and use the MODE button to select the  
chord play method you want to use (NORMAL, CASIO  
CHORD, FINGERED, FULL RANGE CHORD).  
To finish with an ending pattern  
1 While the rhythm is playing, press INTRO/ENDING  
To use synchro start  
button 1 or 2.  
The timing when the ending pattern starts depends  
on when you press the INTRO/ ENDING button 1 or  
2. If you press the button before the second beat of  
the current measure, the ending pattern starts playing  
immediately.  
1 Press the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button to put  
the keyboard into synchro start standby.  
NOTE  
Pressing the INTRO/ENDING button prior to the first half  
beat at the beginning of a measure plays the ending  
immediately. Pressing the button after the first half beat  
of a measure causes the ending to be played from the  
beginning of the following measure.  
2 Play a chord and the rhythm pattern starts to play  
automatically.  
NOTE  
If the MODE button is set to NORMAL, only the rhythm  
plays (without a chord) when you play on the  
accompaniment keyboard.  
If you press the INTRO/ENDING button 1 or 2 before  
playing anything on the keyboard, the rhythm starts  
automatically with an intro pattern when you play  
something on the accompaniment keyboard.  
To cancel synchro start standby, press the SYNCHRO/  
FILL-IN NEXT button one more time.  
E-44  
735A-E-046A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Accompaniment  
Using One-touch Preset  
Using Auto Harmonize  
One-touch preset automatically makes the main settings listed  
below in accordance with the rhythm pattern you are using.  
When you are using Auto Accompaniment, Auto Harmonize  
automatically adds additional notes to your melody in  
accordance with the chord that is being played. The result is  
a harmony effect that makes your melody line richer and  
fuller.  
Keyboard tone  
Layer on/ off  
Split on/ off  
Auto Harmonize on/ off  
Auto Harmonize type  
Accompaniment volume level  
Tempo  
To use Auto Harmonize  
1 Use the MODE button to select FINGERED or  
Effect settings  
CASIO CHORD as the accompaniment mode.  
The currently selected accompaniment mode is the  
one whose lamp is lit. See About the MODE Button”  
on page E-38 for details.  
To use one-touch preset  
1 Select the rhythm you want to use.  
Auto Accompaniment off  
FULL RANGE CHORD  
FINGERED  
2 Use the MODE button to select the accompaniment  
mode you want to use.  
3 Press the ONE TOUCH PRESET button.  
This au tom atically m akes the one-tou ch p reset  
settings in accordance with the rhythm you selected.  
The keyboard automatically enters synchro standby  
at this time.  
CASIO CHORD  
2 Press AUTO HARMONIZE button to turn on Auto  
Harmonize.  
4 Start rhythm and Auto Accompaniment, and play  
This causes the AUTO HARMONIZE indicator to  
something on the keyboard.  
Accompaniment is played using the one-touch preset  
settings.  
appear on the display.  
3 Start Auto Accompaniment play, and play  
something on the keyboard.  
4 To turn off Auto Harmonize, press AUTO  
HARMONIZE button once.  
This causes the AUTO HARMONIZE indicator to  
disappear.  
NOTE  
Auto Harmonize turns off temporarily whenever you start  
demo tune play. It turns back on as soon as the operation  
or function that caused it to turn off is finished.  
Auto Harmonize is enabled only when the Auto  
Accompaniment mode is FINGERED or CASIO CHORD.  
735A-E-047A  
E-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Accompaniment  
ACCOMP VOLUME  
Number buttons  
[+] []  
/
Auto Harmonize Types  
Adjusting the Accompaniment  
Volume  
You can adjust the volume of the accompaniment parts as a  
value in the range of 000 (minimum) to 127 (maximum).  
Auto Harmonize lets you select from among the 10 Auto  
Harmonize types. Type changing is performed by the setting  
item using the TRANSPOSE/ FUNCTION button.  
See Changing Other Settingson page E-79 for more  
information.  
1 Press the ACCOMP VOLUME button.  
Current accompaniment volume setting  
About Auto Harmonize notes and  
tones  
The notes you play on the keyboard are called melody  
notes, w hile the notes ad d ed to the m elod y by Au to  
Harmonize is called the harmonize notes. Auto Harmonize  
normally uses the tone you selected for the melody notes as  
the tone for the harmonize notes, but you can use the Mixer  
(page E-47) to specify a different tone for the harmonize notes.  
The harmonize note tone is assigned to Mixer Channel 5, so  
change Channel 5 to the tone you w ant to use for the  
harmonize notes.  
p
A c om V o l  
2 Use the number buttons or the [+]/[] buttons to  
change the current volume setting value.  
Example: 110  
In addition to the tone, you can also use the Mixer to change  
a number of other parameters, such as volume balance. See  
Using the Parameter Edit Modeon page E-48 for details  
on these procedures.  
p
A c om V o l  
NOTE  
NOTE  
Pressing the ACCOMP VOLUME button or EXIT button  
returns to the tone or rhythm setting screen.  
Any channel balance settings you make with the Mixer  
are maintained when you change the accompaniment  
volume setting.  
The default harmonize note tone when you first turn on  
Auto Harmonize is the same tone as the melody note  
tone.  
Changing the melody tone setting automatically changes  
the harmonize note tone to the same setting.  
Pressing [+] and [] buttons at the same time  
automatically sets an accompaniment volume of 100.  
E-46  
735A-E-048A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Function  
See page E-74 and E-75 for information on layered, split, and  
layered/ split tones.  
What you can do with the Mixer  
This keyboard lets you play multiple different musical  
in stru m en t p arts at th e sam e tim e d u rin g au to-  
accompaniment play, song memory playback, receipt of data  
through the MIDI terminal, etc. The Mixer assigns each part  
to a separate channel (1 through 16) and lets you control the  
channel on/ off, volume, and pan pot parameters of each  
channel.  
In addition to channels 1 through 16, the Mixer also has a  
DSP channel that you can use to adjust the DSP level, DSP  
pan, and other DSP parameters.  
See page E-61 for information on the song memory.  
NOTE  
Normally, keyboard play is assigned to Channel 1. When  
Auto Accompaniment is being used, each part of the  
accompaniment is assigned to Channels 6 through 10.  
When this keyboard is being used as the sound source  
for an externally connected computer or other MIDI  
device, all 16 channels are assigned musical instrument  
parts. The notes played over the channel selected by  
steps 1 and 2 under Turning Channels On and Offin  
the right column of this page are shown on the displayed  
keyboard and staff.  
Channel Assignments  
The following shows the parts that are assigned to each of  
the 16 channels.  
Channel  
Number  
Part  
Turning Channels On and Off  
Press the CHANNEL buttons to toggle individual channels  
on and off. Indicators on the display show the current on/ off  
status of each channel.  
Channel 1  
Channel 2  
Channel 3  
Channel 4  
Channel 5  
Channel 6  
Channel 7  
Channel 8  
Channel 9  
Main tone (UP1)  
Layered tone (UP2)  
Split tone (LOW1)  
Layered/ split tone (LOW2)  
Harmonize Tone (HARM)  
Auto Accompaniment chord part 1 (CHD1)  
Auto Accompaniment chord part 2 (CHD2)  
Auto Accompaniment chord part 3 (CHD3)  
Auto Accompaniment bass part (BASS)  
Channel on  
Channel off  
Each press of a CHANNEL button toggles the applicable  
channel on and off.  
Channel 10 Auto Accompaniment rhythm part (DRUM)  
Channel 11 Song Memory track 1 (TR1)  
Channel 12 Song Memory track 2 (TR2)  
Channel 13 Song Memory track 3 (TR3)  
Channel 14 Song Memory track 4 (TR4)  
Channel 15 Song Memory track 5 (TR5)  
Channel 16 Song Memory track 6 (TR6)  
The on/ off status of each channel determines the on/ off  
status of the corresponding part for keyboard play, Auto  
Accompaniment, and Song Memory playback.  
Changing to a different rhythm causes Mixer Settings for  
channel 6 through channel 10 to change to the default  
settings assigned to the new rhythm. These settings also  
change to the defaults for the currently selected rhythm  
pattern whenever you switch between the Intro, Normal,  
Variation, Fill-in, and Ending patterns.  
NOTE  
In this manual, Channel Numbermatches the channel  
numbers marked on the keyboard above the CHANNEL  
buttons.  
The CHANNEL button name in the above table  
corresponds to the next marked on the keyboard below  
the CHANNEL buttons.  
735A-E-049A  
E-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Function  
MIXER  
CHANNEL  
CURSOR  
Number buttons  
[+] []  
/
4 Use the number buttons or [+] and [] to change  
Using the Parameter Edit Mode  
the parameter setting.  
Example: Change the setting to 060.  
Editing the Parameters for Channels  
1 through 16  
In the Parameter Edit Mode, you can change the settings of  
ten different parameters (including tone, volume, and pan  
pot) for the channel you selected on the Mixer screen.  
V o l ume  
Pressin g th e MIXER or EXIT bu tton exits th e  
parameter edit mode.  
To change parameters  
Editing DSP Channel Parameters  
1 Press the MIXER button.  
This causes a pointer to appear on the display next to  
MIXER.  
1 Press the CHANNEL(DSP) button.  
You can also select the DSP channel by pressing by  
pressing the [̈] CURSOR button Channel 16 is  
selected.  
2 Press a CHANNEL button (1 through 16) to select a  
This selects the DSP channel.  
Pressing the [̇] CURSOR button while the DSP  
channel is selected returns to Channel 16.  
channel.  
Use the [̇] and [ ̈] CURSOR buttons to change  
between channels.  
3 Use [̆] and [̄] CURSOR to select the parameter  
whose setting you want to change.  
Example: Select volume setting by displaying Volume.  
Each press of [̆] or [̄] CURSOR cycles through the  
parameters.  
You can use the [̇] and [ ̈] CURSOR buttons to  
change to another channel at any time during this  
procedure.  
Indicates channel volume of 127  
V o l ume  
E-48  
735A-E-050A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Function  
Octave Shift (Range: 2 to 0 to +2)  
How Parameters Work  
The following are the parameters whose settings can be  
You can use octave shift to shift the range of the tone up or  
down. When using the piccolo tone, there may be cases when  
very high notes you want to play are not included within the  
range of the keyboard. When this happens, you can use octave  
shift to shift the keyboard range one octave up.  
changed in the Parameter Edit Mode.  
Tone Parameters  
Tone  
(Range: 000 to 803, Drawbar organ tones 000 to 199)  
Oc t S h i f t  
This parameter controls the tones assigned to each part.  
Anytime the tone is on the display, you can use the TONE  
button or DRAWBAR ORGAN button and then select a  
different tone, if you want.  
2 : Range shifted two octaves down.  
1 : Range shifted one octave down.  
0 : No shift  
+1 : Range shifted one octave up.  
+2 : Range shifted two octaves up.  
G r a n d P n o  
Tuning Parameters  
You can use these parameters to tune each of the parts  
individually.  
Part On/Off (Settings: on, oFF)  
This parameter can be used to turn each part on (sounds)  
and off (does not sound). The current on/ off status of each  
part is indicated on the display as described below.  
Coarse Tune (Range: 24 to 00 to +24)  
This parameter controls the coarse tuning of the selected  
channels pitch in semitone units.  
Ch a n n e l  
Volume (Range: 000 to 127)  
C . T u n e  
This is the parameter that controls the volume of the selected  
channel.  
Fine Tune (Range: 99 to 00 to +99)  
This parameter controls the fine tuning of the selected  
channels pitch in cent units.  
V o l ume  
Pan Pot (Range: 64 to 00 to +63)  
F i n e T u n e  
This parameter controls the pan pot, which is the center point  
of the left and right stereo channels. Setting 00specifies  
center, a value less than 00moves the point left, and a value  
greater than 00moves it right.  
P a n  
735A-E-051A  
E-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Function  
DSP System Reverb Send (Range: 000 to 127)  
Effect Parameters  
The Mixer lets you control the effects applied to each  
individual part, making it different from the Effect Mode,  
whose settings are applied to all parts in general.  
This parameter adjusts how much reverb is applied to all  
parts.  
D . R v b S n d  
Reverb Send (Range: 000 to 127)  
This parameter controls how much reverb is applied to a part.  
A setting of 000turns reverb off, while a setting of 127  
applies maximum reverb.  
DSP System Chorus Send (Range: 000 to 127)  
This parameter adjusts chorus.  
• “Reverb Senddoes not work with some drum sounds.  
D . Ch o S n d  
R v b S e n d  
NOTE  
Chorus Send (Range: 000 to 127)  
Changing the tone, volume, pan pot, coarse tune, fine  
tune, reverb send, or chorus send setting causes the  
corresponding MIDI message to be output from the MIDI  
terminal.  
This parameter controls how much chorus send is applied to  
a part. A setting 000turns chorus send off, while a setting  
of 127 applies maximum chorus send.  
• “Chorus Senddoes not work with drum sounds.  
Changing the tone settings changes the tone, octave  
shift, reverb send, chorus send, and DSP line* parameter  
settings.  
* When DSP is off (See the note on page E-82.)  
Turning on the Mixers DSP Line parameter (page E-  
49) causes the settings of the DSP Pan, DSP System  
Reverb Send, and DSP System Chorus parameters to  
be used in place of the Pan Pot, Reverb Send, and  
Chorus Send parameters.  
Ch o S e n d  
DSP Line (Settings: on, oFF)  
You can use this parameter to turn DSP line off for a particular  
channel, or to turn it on.  
DSP L i n e  
DSP Part Parameters  
DSP Level (Range: 0 to 127)  
Sets the post-DSP volume.  
DSP L e v e l  
DSP Pan (Range: 64 to 0 to 63)  
Sets the post-DSP stereo pan.  
DSPP a n  
E-50  
735A-E-052A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Synthesizer Mode  
The Synthesizer Mode of this keyboard provides the tools  
(1) Tone Characteristic Waveform  
Tone Setting  
for creating your own original tones. Simply select one of the  
built-in tones and change its parameters to create your own  
original sound. You can even store your sounds in memory  
and select it using the same procedure as that used to select a  
preset tone.  
Specifies which of the preset tones should be used as the  
original tone.  
(2) Volume Characteristic Parameters  
Synthesizer Mode Functions  
The following describes how to use each of the functions  
These parameters control how the tone changes over time,  
from when the keyboard key is pressed until the tone decays.  
You can specify changes in volume and sound characteristics.  
available in the Synthesizer Mode.  
Attack time  
Synthesizer Mode Parameters  
This is the rate or time it takes for the tone to reach its highest  
volume level. You can specify a fast rate, where the tone  
reaches its highest volume level immediately, a slow rate  
where it gradually rises, or something in between.  
The preset tones that are built into this keyboard consist of a  
number of parameters. To create a user tone, you first recall a  
advanced tone (000 to 299) or a preset tone (300 to 499) and  
then change its parameters to change it to your own tone.  
Note that drum set tones (500 through 515) cannot be used  
as the basis of a user tone.  
The illustration nearby shows the parameters that make up  
the preset tones and what each parameter does. As can be  
seen in the illustration, parameters can be divided into four  
groups, each of which is described in detail below.  
Release time  
This is the rate or time it takes for the tone volume to fall to  
zero. You can specify a release that ranges from a sudden fall  
to zero, to one that gradually falls to zero.  
Volume Characteristic  
Parameters  
Envelope  
Note ends  
bAttack Time  
bRelease Time  
bCutoff Frequency  
bResonance  
Time  
Tone Pitch Parameters  
A
R
bVibrato Type  
Key pressed  
Key released  
Tone Characteristic  
Waveform  
bVibrato Delay  
A: Attack time  
R: Release time  
bVibrato Rate  
bVibrato Depth  
Tone Setting  
Output  
bOctave Shift  
Cutoff Frequency  
Tone Characteristic  
Setting Parameters  
The cutoff frequency is a parameter for adjusting timbre by  
cutting any frequency that is higher than a specific frequency.  
A larger cutoff frequency produces a brighter (harder) timbre,  
while a smaller frequency produces a darker (softer) timbre.  
bLevel  
bTouch Sense  
bReverb Send  
bChorus Send  
bDSP Line  
bDSP Type  
bDSP Parameter  
Level  
NOTE  
Note that the tone whose parameter you can edit is the  
one assigned to the channel (1 through 4) that is currently  
selected with the Synthesizer Mode.  
Frequency  
Cutoff frequency  
735A-E-053A  
E-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Synthesizer Mode  
Resonance  
Resonance enhances the harmonic components in the vicinity  
of the cutoff frequency, which creates a distinctive sound. A  
larger resonance value enhances the sound as shown in the  
figure.  
Level  
Frequency  
Cut off frequency  
Small Value  
Large Value  
Resonance  
NOTE  
With some tones, a large resonance value can cause  
distortion or noise during the attack part of the tone.  
(3) Tone Pitch Parameters  
Vibrato Type, Vibrato Delay, Vibrato Rate, Vibrato  
Depth  
These parameters adjust the vibrato effect, which causes  
periodic changes in the tone.  
Octave Shift  
This parameter controls the octave of all tones.  
(4) Tone Characteristic Setting Parameters  
Level  
This parameter controls the overall volume of the tone.  
Touch Sense  
This parameter controls changes in volume and timbre in  
accordance with the relative amount of pressure applied to  
the keyboard keys. You can specify more volume for stronger  
pressure and less volume or a lighter pressure, or you can specify  
the same volume regardless of how much pressure is applied to  
the keys.  
Reverb Send, Chorus Send, DSP Line , DSP Type, DSP  
Parameter  
These parameters control the effects applied to tones.  
E-52  
735A-E-054A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Synthesizer Mode  
Saving User Tones  
The group of tone numbers from 600 through 699 (User 001 through User 100) is called the user areabecause they are reserved for  
storage of user tones. After you recall a preset tone and change its parameters to create your own user tone, you can store it in the user  
area for later recall. You can recall your tones using the same procedure that you use when selecting a preset tone.  
Number Tone Type  
Standard Tone  
000-299 Advanced Tones  
300-499 Preset Tones  
500-515 Drum Sets  
Source Tone Select  
Save As Original Tone  
600-699 User Area  
Parameter Edit  
600-699 User Tones*1  
700-719 User Tones with Waves*2  
800-803 User Drum Sets with Waves*3  
Drawbar Organ Tones  
000-049 Preset Tones  
100-199 User Tones*4  
*1: You can select any Advance Tone, preset tone, or user tone. User tone areas 600 through 699 initially contain the same data as  
DSP types 000 through 099.  
*2: Area where data transferred from computer is stored (see Using the Data Downloard Serviceon page E-91). After transfer,  
you can use the keyboard to edit parameters, but you can only overwrite existing parameters. You cannot save the data to  
another number. Initially, nothing is stored in the user tone with wave memory area.  
*3: Area where data transferred from computer is stored (see Using the Data Downloard Serviceon page E-91). Transfer only  
is allowed, and no parameter editing is allowed. Initially, nothing is stored in the user drum set with wave memory area.  
*4: User tones created by modifying parameters of one of the preset tones (000 to 049). User drawbar organ tone areas initially  
contain two sets of the same data as drawbar organ tones types 000 through 049.  
NOTE  
You can create an original tone using a user tone that includes a waveform (tone number 700 to 719). In this case, the  
storage area is the same as the source tone area. For example, an original tone created using tone number 700 as a source  
tone is stored in user area number 700.  
735A-E-055A  
E-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Synthesizer Mode  
SYNTH  
CURSOR  
WK-3000  
MODULATION button lamp  
[+] []  
/
NOTE  
Creating a User Tone  
See Storing a User Tone In Memoryon page E-57 for  
details on saving user tone data to memory so it is not  
deleted.  
Use the following procedure to select a preset tone and change  
its parameters to create a user tone.  
1 First, select the preset tone you want to use as a  
basis for your user tone.  
Parameters and Their Settings  
The following describes the function of each parameter and  
provides its setting range.  
2 Press the SYNTH button.  
This enters the Synth Mode, which is indicated by the  
pointer next to SYNTH on the display screen.  
Parameter setting value  
Attack Time (Range: 64 to 00 to +63)  
Currently selected parameter  
Time it takes before the tone sounds after a key is pressed  
A t k T i me  
A t k T i me  
Release Time (Range: 64 to 00 to +63)  
3 Use [̇] and [̈] CURSOR to display the parameter  
Time the tone continues to sound after a key is released  
whose setting you want to change.  
y
Re l . T i me  
V i bDe l a  
Cutoff Frequency  
Each press of [̇] or [̈] CURSOR changes to the next  
parameter. See Parameters and Their Settingson  
this page for information on setting range for each  
parameter.  
(Range: 64 to 00 to +63)  
High-band cutoff for the harmonic components of the tone  
4 Use [+] and [] to change the setting of the currently  
q
C - o f f F r  
selected parameter.  
You can also use the number buttons to input a value  
to change a parameter setting. See Parameters and  
Their Settingson this page for information on setting  
range for each parameter.  
Resonance (Range: 64 to 00 to +63)  
Resonance of the tone  
5 After you are finished editing the sound, press the  
Re s o n a n .  
SYNTH button to exit the Synthesizer Mode.  
E-54  
735A-E-056A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Synthesizer Mode  
Modulation Assign (Range: *)  
Modulation Depth (Range: 0 to 127) (WK-3000 only)  
Th e Mod u lation Assign p aram eter sp ecifies w h ich  
parameters should be affected when you use the keyboards  
modulation function. Select oFFfor any parameters that  
you do not want affected by the modulation function.  
On the WK-3000, this parameter controls the modulation  
value when the MODULATION button is pressed. How the  
MODULATION button functions depends on the modulation  
assign parameter setting as described below.  
If this setting is  
selected for  
modulation assign:  
Modulation is applied like this:  
Mo d u l a t .  
Modulation is applied to the depth specified  
by the value assigned to the Mod ulation  
Dep th p aram eter as lon g as th e  
MODULATION bu tton is d ep ressed .  
Releasing the MODULATION button causes  
the modulation value to return to the initial  
default value for the tone being used.  
*
Value  
oFF  
vib  
Meaning  
vib  
Off  
Control Change 01h (Modulation)  
dp0  
Control Change 16  
(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 0.)  
Each press of the MODULATION button  
toggles m od u lation betw een th e valu e  
dp1  
dp2  
dp3  
dp4  
dp5  
dp6  
dp7  
Control Change 17  
(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 1.)  
dp0 through dp7 assigned to the Modulation Depth Parameter  
and the initial default value for the tone being  
used.  
Control Change 18  
(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 2.)  
Control Change 19  
(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 3.)  
p
Mo dDe t h  
Control Change 80  
(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 4.)  
Control Change 81  
(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 5.)  
MODULATION Button Lamp  
The MODULATION button lamp lights when the current  
modulation depth is at its greatest possible setting. This can  
occur either when the MODULATION button is depressed  
or released, depending on the current Modulation Depth  
paramerter setting and the initial default modulation depth  
value of the tone you are currently using.  
Control Change 82  
(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 6.)  
Control Change 83  
(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 7.)  
NOTE  
If the Modulation Assign setting of a tone is any setting  
from dp0 through dp7, that setting is ignored when the  
tone is used as a layered or split tone. DSP parameter  
effects are applied to the main tone only.  
735A-E-057A  
E-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Synthesizer Mode  
Vibrato Waveform (Range: See below.)  
Touch Sensitivity (Range: 64 to 00 to +63)  
Specifies the vibrato waveform.  
This parameter controls changes in the volume of the tone in  
accordance with the pressure applied to the keyboard keys. A  
greater positive value increases the volume of the output as  
pressure increases, while a negative value decreases volume  
with increased keyboard pressure. A setting of zero specifies  
no change in output volume in accordance with keyboard  
pressure.  
y
p
V i b . T e  
Value  
Sin  
Meaning  
Waveform  
Sine Wave  
T c h S e n s e  
tri  
Triangle Wave  
Sawtooth Wave  
Square Wave  
Reverb Send (Range: 000 to 127)  
SAU  
Sqr  
This parameter adjusts reverb.  
R v b S e n d  
Vibrato Delay (Range: 64 to 00 to +63)  
Chorus Send (Range: 000 to 127)  
Specifies the amount of time before vibrato starts.  
This parameter adjusts chorus.  
y
V i bDe l a  
Ch o S e n d  
Vibrato Rate (Range: 64 to 00 to +63)  
DSP Line (Settings: on, oFF)  
Rate (speed) of the vibrato effect  
This parameter controls whether or not the DSP effect is used.  
V i b . Ra t e  
DSP L i n e  
Vibrato Depth (Range: 64 to 00 to +63)  
Depth of the vibrato effect  
p
V i bDe t h  
Octave Shift (Range: 2 to 0 to +2)  
Up/ down octave shift  
Oc t S h i f t  
Level (Range: 000 to 127)  
This parameter controls the overall volume of the tone. The  
greater the value, the greater the volume. Setting a level of  
zero means that the tone does not sound at all.  
L e v e l  
E-56  
735A-E-058A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Synthesizer Mode  
SYNTH  
CURSOR  
[+] []  
/
DSP Settings  
Storing a User Tone In Memory  
Use the DSP editing screen to select the DSP type and to edit  
parameters.  
The following procedure shows how to store a user tone in  
memory. Once a tone is stored, you can call it up just as you  
do with a preset tone.  
1 Select a tone, press the SYNTH button, and then  
configure parameter settings.  
To name a user tone and store it in  
memory  
2 After everything is the way you want, press the [̄]  
CURSOR button once.  
1 Select a preset tone to use as the basis for the user  
tone, press the SYNTH button to enter the  
Synthesizer Mode, and make the parameter settings  
you want.  
This advances to the DSP parameter editing screen.  
Pressing the [̆] CURSOR button returns to the  
Synthesizer Mode parameter screen.  
This setting specifies DSP parameters. See DSP Parameters”  
on page E-33, Effect Liston page A-17, and DSP Algorithm  
Liston page A-19 for more information.  
2 After making parameter settings to create the user  
tone, press [̄] CURSOR twice.  
NOTE  
3 Use [+] and [] to change the user area tone number  
If you store an original tone with the DSP line turned on  
(see next page), simply recalling the tone automatically  
changes the DSP line, DSP type, and DSP parameter  
settings. This simplifies the recall of original tones that  
include a DSP effect.  
on the display until the one where you want to  
store the tone is shown.  
You can select any tone number from 600 to 699.  
User Tone Creation Hints  
The following hints provide helpful advice on making user  
tone creation a bit quicker and easier.  
Use a preset tone that is similar to the one you are trying to  
create.  
Whenever you already have a rough idea of the tone you are  
trying to create, it is always a good idea to start with a preset  
tone that is similar.  
4 After the tone name is the way you want, press the  
[̈] CURSOR button to store the tone.  
Use the [+] and [] buttons to scroll through letters at  
the current cursor location.  
Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to move the  
cursor left and right.  
See the page E-103 for information about inputting  
text.  
Experiment with various different settings.  
There are no real rules about what a tone should sound like.  
Let your imagination run free and experiment with different  
combinations. You may be surprised at what you can achieve.  
735A-E-059A  
E-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Synthesizer Mode  
CURSOR  
5 Press [̄] CURSOR to save the user tone.  
This will display a confirmation message asking  
whether you really want to save the data. Press the  
YES button to save the data.  
The message Completeappears momentarily on the  
display, followed by the tone or rhythm selection  
screen.  
To abort the save operation at any time, press the  
SYN TH bu tton or the EXIT bu tton to exit the  
Synthesizer Mode. Pressing the SYNTH button again  
(before selectin g an oth er ton e) retu rn s to th e  
Synthesizer Mode with all of your parameter settings  
still in place.  
E-58  
735A-E-060A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registration Memory  
Setup Names  
Registration Memory Features  
You can assign setups into one of 32 areas, which you can  
select u sing BAN K bu ttons 1 throu gh 4 and the fou r  
REGISTRATION buttons. Area names range from 1-1 through  
8-4 as shown below.  
Registration memory lets you store up to 32 keyboard setups  
(4 sets x 8 banks) for instant recall whenever you need them.  
The following is a list of settings that are saved in registration  
memory.  
Registration Memory Settings  
Tone  
Rhythm  
Tempo  
Layer on/ off  
1
2
Split on/ off  
Split point  
1
2
3
4
Auto Harmonize on/ off  
Mixer settings (Channels 1 to 10)  
Effect settings  
Touch Response settings  
Assignable jack setting  
Transpose  
BANK 1  
1-1  
2-1  
3-1  
4-1  
5-1  
6-1  
7-1  
8-1  
1-2  
2-2  
3-2  
4-2  
5-2  
6-2  
7-2  
8-2  
1-3  
2-3  
3-3  
4-3  
5-3  
6-3  
7-3  
8-3  
1-4  
2-4  
3-4  
4-4  
5-4  
6-4  
7-4  
8-4  
BANK 2  
BANK 3  
BANK 4  
BANK 5  
BANK 6  
BANK 7  
BANK 8  
Tuning  
Accompaniment volume setting  
Pitch bend range  
Auto Harmonize type  
MODE button setting  
Synchro standby state  
Mixer Hold  
1 Use the BANK button to select the bank. Each press of  
BANK cycle through the bank numbers from 1 to 8.  
2 Pressing one of the REGISTRATION buttons (1 to 4) selects  
the corresponding area in the currently selected bank.  
DSP Hold  
Synthesizer Mode parameters  
NOTE  
NOTE  
Whenever you save a setup and assign it a setup name,  
any setup data previously assigned to that name is  
replaced with the new data.  
You can use the keyboards MIDI capabilities to save  
your setup data to a computer or other external storage  
device. See Using the Data Download Serviceon page  
E-91 for details.  
Each bank of registration memory initially contains data  
when you first use the keyboard. Simple replace the  
existing data with your own data.  
Registration memory functions are disabled while you  
are using the SMF Player, Song Memory or demo tune  
function.  
Registration memory functions are also disabled while  
you are using the floppy disc drive (WK-3500 only) or  
card slot (page E-94).  
You can save setup data to external media, if you want.  
See Saving Dataon page E-92 for more information.  
735A-E-061A  
E-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registration Memory  
Number buttons  
BANK  
REGISTRATION  
STORE  
To Save a Setup in Registration  
Memory  
To Recall a Setup from  
Registration Memory  
1 Select a tone and rhythm, and otherwise set up the  
1 Use the BANK button or the number buttons to  
keyboard the way you want it.  
select the bank.  
See Registration Memory Settingson page E-59 for  
details on what data is stored in the registration  
memory.  
If you do not perform any operation for about five  
seconds after pressing the BANK button, the keyboard  
automatically clears the registration memory recall  
screen.  
2 Use the BANK button or the number buttons to  
select the bank you want.  
If you do not perform any operation for about five  
seconds after pressing the BANK button, the display  
returns to the contents in step 1, above.  
B a n k  
2 Press the REGISTRATION button (1 to 4) or number  
Bank 1 selected.  
buttons for the area whose setup you want to recall.  
B a n k  
Re c a l l  
The setup name along with the message Recall”  
3 While holding down the STORE button, press a  
appears on the display.  
REGISTRATION button (1 to 4).  
The following display appears when you press the 2  
button.  
NOTE  
If you press a REGISTRATION button without using the  
BANK button to select a bank first, the last bank number  
selected is used.  
S t o r e  
4 Release the STORE and REGISTRATION buttons.  
NOTE  
The setup is saved as soon as you press a  
REGISTRATION button in step 3, above.  
E-60  
735A-E-062A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Song Memory Function  
This keyboard lets you record up to five separate songs in  
Selecting a Track  
Use the SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons marked CHORD/  
TR1 through TR6 to select the track you want.  
song memory for later playback. There are two methods you  
can use to record a song: real-time recording where you record  
the notes as you play them on the keyboard , and step  
recording where you input chords and notes one-by-one.  
Song Memory Track Buttons  
Track 4  
NOTE  
Layer and split cannot be used while standing by for  
recording or while recording is being performed in the  
Song Memory Mode. Also, layer and split are  
automatically turned off whenever the keyboard goes  
into record standby or starts recording.  
Track 2  
Track 6  
Track 1  
Track 5  
Track 3  
Tracks  
Keyboard song memory records and plays back much like a  
standard tape recorder. There are a total of six tracks, each of  
which can be recorded separately. Besides notes, each track  
can have its own tone number. Then when you play back the  
tracks together, it sounds like an entire six-piece band. During  
playback, you can adjust the tempo to change the speed of  
playback.  
Basic Song Memory operations  
The status of the Song Memory changes each time you press  
the SONG MEMORY button.  
Playback  
y
P l a  
Start  
End  
Auto accompaniment (Rhythm,  
Track 1  
Bass, Chord 1/2/3), Keyboard play  
Flash  
Real-time Recording  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
Track 6  
Keyboard play  
Keyboard play  
Keyboard play  
Keyboard play  
Keyboard play  
Re c o r d  
Step Recording  
Melody data recorded in track.  
NOTE  
p
S t e  
Re c  
With this keyboard, Track 1 is the basic track, which  
can be used to record keyboard play, along with Auto  
Accompaniment. Tracks 2 through 6 can be used for  
keyboard play, so they are called melody tracks. Tracks  
2 through 6 are used to add other parts to what is  
recorded in Track 1.  
Flash  
Normal  
Note that each track is independent of the others. This  
means that even if you make a mistake while recording,  
you only need to re-record the track where the mistake  
was made.  
You can use different Mixer settings for each track (page  
E-47).  
735A-E-063A  
E-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Song Memory Function  
SONG MEMORY  
Number buttons  
START/STOP  
4 Press the START/STOP button to start recording.  
When recording starts, the REC indicator flashes on  
the display. After a few moments the indicator stops  
flashing, and remains on the display.  
Using Real-time Recording  
With real-time recording, the notes you play on the keyboard  
are recorded as you play them.  
Real-time recording without a rhythm starts. If you  
want to record with a rhythm, press the INTRO/  
ENDING 1/ 2 or VARIATION/ FILL-IN 1/ 2.  
To record with real-time recording  
1 Press the SONG MEMORY button twice to enter  
5 Play something on the keyboard.  
real-time record standby.  
You can also record Auto Accompaniment chords by  
selecting the applicable mode with the MODE button.  
Op tion al p ed al, p itch ben d an d m u d u lation  
operations are also recorded. See Track 1 Contents  
After Real-time Recording.  
Perform step 2, below, within five seconds after  
entering record standby.  
6 Press the START/STOP button to end recording  
The level meters for tracks 11 through 16 are shown  
on the display while the keyboard is in record standby,  
so you can easily check which tracks are already  
recorded. See Level Meter Contents During Record/  
Edit Standbyon page E-69 for details.  
when you are finish playing.  
If you make a mistake while recording, you can stop  
the record operation and begin over again from step  
1, or you can use the editing function (page E-70) to  
make corrections.  
2 Use the number buttons to select a song number  
NOTE  
(0 to 4).  
Using real-time recording to record to a track that already  
contains recorded data replaces the previous recording  
with the new one.  
Song number  
Re c o r d  
The above song number screen remains on the display  
for about five seconds.  
3 Make the following settings.  
Tone number  
Rhythm number  
Tempo  
MODE button  
E-62  
735A-E-064A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Song Memory Function  
Track 1 Contents After Real-time  
Recording  
In addition to keyboard notes and accompaniment chords,  
the following data is also recorded to Track 1 during real-  
time recording. This data is applied whenever Track 1 is  
played back.  
Memory Data Storage  
Whenever you make a new recording, anything previously  
stored in memory is replaced.  
Turning off the keyboard while a record operation is in  
progress causes the contents of the track your are currently  
recording to be lost.  
You can save memory data to external media, if you want.  
See Saving Dataon page E-92 for more information.  
Remember that you can dump memory contents to another  
MIDI device using the procedure described under Using  
the Data Download Serviceon page E-91.  
Tone number  
Rhythm number  
INTRO/ ENDING 1 button, INTRO/ ENDING 2 button,  
VARIATION/ FILL-IN 1 button, VARIATION/ FILL-IN 2  
button, SYNCRHO/ FILL-IN NEXT button operations  
Pedal operations (option)  
Track 1 Real-time Recording  
Variations  
The following describes a number of different variations you  
can use when recording to Track 1 using real-time recording.  
All of these variations are based upon the procedure described  
under To record with real-time recordingon page E-62.  
The following data is recorded in the header whenever you  
start a recording of a track.  
Mixer settings of other tracks  
Effect type  
Accompaniment volume  
Reverb Level  
To start recording with synchro start  
Chorus Level  
In place of step 4, press the SYNCHRO/ FILL-IN NEXT  
button. Auto-accompaniment and recording will both start  
when you play a chord on the accompaniment keyboard.  
DSP Hold On/ Off  
Mixer Hold On/ Off  
Pitch bend wheel operation  
Modulation wheel operation (WK-3500)  
Mudulation button operation (WK-3000)  
Pitch bend range  
To record using an intro, ending, or fill-in  
During recording, the INTRO/ ENDING 1/ 2, SYNCHRO/  
FILL-IN N EXT, and VARIATION / FILL-IN 1/ 2 buttons  
(pages E-43 to 44) can all be used as they normally are.  
Mixer Mode Settings  
Channel 1 Mixer parameters (page E-47) are automatically  
recorded to Track 1. You can use the Mixer to change each of  
the parameters.  
To synchro start Auto Accompaniment with an intro  
pattern  
In place of step 4, press the SYNCHRO/ FILL-IN NEXT button  
and then INTRO/ ENDING 1 or INTRO/ ENDING 2 button.  
Auto-accompaniment will start with the intro pattern when  
you play a chord on the accompaniment keyboard.  
Memory Capacity  
The keyboard has memory for approximately 10,000 notes.  
To start Auto Accompaniment part way into a recording  
In place of step 4, press the SYNCHRO/ FILL-IN NEXT button  
and then play something on the melody keyboard to start  
recording without Auto Accompaniment. When you reach  
the point where you want accompaniment to start, play a  
chord on the accom p anim ent keyboard to start Au to  
Accompaniment.  
The measure number and note number flash on the display  
whenever remaining memory is less than 100 notes.  
Recording automatically stops (and auto-accompaniment  
and rhythm stops playing if they are being used) whenever  
memory becomes full.  
Initially, nothing is stored in song memory.  
735A-E-065A  
E-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Song Memory Function  
SONG MEMORY  
Number buttons  
SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT  
START/STOP  
SONG MEMORY TRACK  
Playing Back from Song Memory  
Once you record tracks to song memory, you can play them  
Recording Melody and Chords  
with Step Recording  
back to see what they sound like.  
With step recording, you can record Auto-Accompaniment  
chords and notes, and even specify note lengths one by one.  
Even those who find it difficult to play along on the keyboard  
w ith an Au to-Accom p an im en t can create Au to-  
Accom p anim ents based on their ow n original chord  
progressions. The following shows the type of data that can  
be recorded in Tracks 1 through 6.  
To play back from song memory  
1 Use the SONG MEMORY button to enter playback  
standby, and then use the number buttons to select  
a song number (0 to 4).  
Track 1: Chords and Auto-Accompaniment  
Tracks 2 through 6: Keyboard play  
Song number  
Playback standby  
With step record ing, first record the chord s and Auto-  
Accompaniment in Track 1. Next, record the melody in Tracks  
2 through 6.  
y
P l a  
The above song number screen remains on the display  
for about five seconds. If it disappears before you have  
a chance to select a song number, use the [̄] CURSOR  
button to re-display it.  
NOTE  
Use the procedure under To record to Tracks 2 through  
6 using step recordingon page E-68 for details on how  
to record to Tracks 2 through 6.  
2 Press the START/STOP button to playback the song  
you selected.  
You can use the TEMPO buttons to adjust the playback  
tempo.  
Press the START/ STOP button again to stop playback.  
NOTE  
You can play along on the keyboard using layer (page  
E-74) and split (page E-75) during playback.  
Pressing the START/STOP button to start playback from  
song memory always starts from the beginning of the  
song.  
The entire keyboard functions as a melody keyboard,  
regardless of the MODE button setting.  
To turn off a specific track  
Press the SONG MEMORY TRACK button of the track you  
want to turn off, or use the Mixer (Page E-47) to turn off the  
channel of the track.  
E-64  
735A-E-066A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Song Memory Function  
7 After you are finished recording, press the START/  
To record chords with step recording  
STOP button.  
This enters playback standby for the song you have  
just recorded.  
To play back the song at this time, press the START/  
STOP button.  
1 Press the SONG MEMORY button three times to  
enter step recording standby, and then use the  
number buttons to select the song number (0 to 4).  
Flash  
NOTE  
Use the procedure under Correcting Mistakes While  
Step Recordingon page E-69 to correct input mistakes  
you make during step recording.  
You can add on to a track that already contains recorded  
data by selecting that track in step 3 of the above  
procedure. Doing so automatically locates the step  
recording start point at the first beat immediately  
following the previously recorded data.  
p
S t e  
Re c  
2 Make the following settings.  
Rhythm number  
MODE button  
Inputting 0as the chord length in steps 5 and 6 of the  
above procedure specifies a rest, but the rest is not  
reflected in the accompaniment contents when the  
accompaniment is played.  
3 Press the CHORD/TR1 button, which is one of the  
SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons, to select Track1.  
When recording starts, the REC indicator flashes on  
the display. After a few moments the indicator stops  
flashing, and remains on the display.  
Track 1 Contents After Step  
Recording  
4 Press the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button.  
5 Play a chord.  
In addition to chords, the following data is also recorded to  
Track 1 during step recording. This data is applied whenever  
Track 1 is played back.  
Use the chord play method that is specified by the  
current MODE button setting (Fingered , CASIO  
Chord, etc.).  
Rhythm number  
When the MODE button is set to Normal, specify the  
chord using the root input keyboard and chord type  
inp u t keyboard . See Sp ecifying Chord s in the  
Normal Modeon page E-66 for details.  
INTRO/ ENDING 1 button, INTRO/ ENDING 2 button,  
VARIATION/ FILL-IN 1 button, VARIATION/ FILL-IN 2  
button, SYNCHRO/ FILL-IN NEXT button operations  
NOTE  
Ch o r d  
You can also use number buttons 1 through 7, and button  
9 to specify the button release timing for the VARIATION/  
FILL-IN 1, VARIATION/FILL-IN 2, and SYNCHRO/FILL-  
IN buttons. For more information, see Specifying the  
Length of a Noteon page E-66. Specifying release  
timing specifies that the applicable button remains  
depressed for a particular amount of time. If you do not  
specify the release timing, it is assumed that the button  
is pressed and then immediately released.  
Cord name  
Measure, beat, and clock at  
current location*  
* 96 clocks = 1 beat  
6 Input the length of the chord (how long it should  
be played until the next chord is played).  
Use the number buttons to specify the length of the  
chord. See Specifying the Length of a Noteon page  
E-66 for details.  
The specified chord and its length are stored in  
memory and the keyboard stands by for input of the  
next chord.  
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to input more chords.  
735A-E-067A  
E-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Song Memory Function  
Specifying Chords in the Normal  
Mode  
When the MODE button is set to NORMAL during step  
recording, you can specify chords using a method that is  
different from CASIO Chord and Fingered fingerings. This  
chord specification method can be used to input 18 different  
chord types using only two keyboard keys, so chords can be  
specified even if you dont know how to actually play them.  
Specifying the Length of a Note  
During step recording, the number buttons are used to specify  
the length of each note.  
Note lengths  
Use number buttons [1] through [6] to specify whole notes  
( ), half notes ( ), quarter notes ( ), eighth notes ( ), 16th  
notes ( ), and 32nd notes ( ).  
Example: To specify a quarter note ( ), press [3].  
Dots ( ) and triplicates (  
)
While holding down the [7] (dot) or [9] (triplicate), use buttons  
[1] through [6] to input the lengths of the notes.  
Example: To input a dotted eighth notes ( ), hold down [7]  
and press [4].  
Root input keyboard  
Chord type input  
keyboard  
0
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Seventh flat five  
Minor seventh flat five  
Seventh suspended four  
Diminished seventh  
Minor add ninth  
Add ninth  
Minor sixth  
Sixth  
Six ninth  
Major  
Minor  
Augmented  
Diminished  
Suspended four  
Seventh  
Minor seventh  
Major seventh  
Minor major seventh  
Ties  
Input the first and then the second note.  
Example: To input  
, press [4] and then [8]. Next, press  
[5]. This note will be tied to the next note you input  
(16th note in this example).  
Rest  
Hold down [0] and then use number buttons [1] through [9]  
to specify the length of the rest.  
To specify a chord, hold down the key on the root input  
keyboard that specifies the root, and press the key in the chord  
typ e inp u t keyboard to sp ecify the chord typ e. When  
inputting a chord with a specified bass note, pressing two  
keys of the root input keyboard causes the lower note to be  
specified as a bass note.  
Example: To input an eighth note rest, hold down [0] and press  
[4].  
Pressing the [̈] CURSOR button inputs rests up to the  
beginning of the next measure.  
Track 1 Step Recording Variations  
Example 1: To input Gm7, hold down G on the root input  
keyboard and press the m7 key on the chord type  
input keyboard.  
The following describes a number of different variations you  
can use when recording to Track 1 using step recording. All  
of these variations are based upon the procedure described  
under To record chords with step recordingon page E-65.  
To start accompaniment with an intro pattern  
In step 4, press INTRO/ ENDING 1 or INTRO/ ENDING 2  
button after the SYNCHRO/ FILL-IN NEXT button.  
(G)  
(m7)  
Hold down key to specify chord  
root.  
Press key to specify chord  
type  
To switch to a rhythm variation  
Example 2: To input Gm/ C, hold down C and G on the root  
input keyboard and press the m key on the chord  
type input keyboard.  
In step 5, press VARIATION/ FILL-IN 1 or VARIATION/  
FILL-IN 2 button immediately before inputting the chord.  
To insert a fill in  
In step 5, press VARIATION/ FILL-IN 1 or VARIATION/  
FILL-IN 2 button at the measure or beat immediately before  
the chord or beat where you want to insert the fill in.  
(C)  
(G)  
(m)  
Hold down key to specify on bass  
and chord root.  
Press key to specify  
chord type.  
To insert an ending  
In step 5, press INTRO/ ENDING 1 or INTRO/ ENDING 2  
button at the measure or beat immediately before the chord  
where you want to insert the ending.  
E-66  
735A-E-068A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Song Memory Function  
SONG MEMORY  
Number buttons  
START/STOP  
SONG MEMORY TRACK  
IMPORTANT!  
To record to Tracks 2 through 6 using  
real-time recording  
You can record to Tracks 2 through 6 while playing back what  
you originally recorded on Track 1 and any other tracks that  
are already recorded.  
The length of the ending depends on the rhythm you  
are using. Check the length of the pattern you are using  
and set the length of the chord accordingly in step 6.  
Making the chord too short in step 6 can result in the  
ending pattern being cut off.  
1 Press the SONG MEMORY button twice to enter  
To step record chords without rhythm  
record standby, and then use the number buttons  
Skip step 4. The specified chord of the length specified by  
the number buttons is recorded. A rest can be specified here,  
so an original chord pattern can be created.  
to select a song number (0 to 4).  
The song number you select should be the one where  
you previously input Track 1.  
To add chord accompaniment part way through rhythm  
play  
2 Use the SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons to select  
the track you want to record to (2 through 6).  
While the keyboard is in record standby, the display  
shows the level meters for channels 11 through 16, so  
you can check w hich tracks have alread y been  
recorded. See Level Meter Contents During Record/  
Edit Standbyon page E-69 for details.  
In Place of step 4 at the start of the record ing, p ress  
VARIATION/ FILL-IN 1 or VARIATION/ FILL-IN 2 button  
and input rests. Then in step 5, input the chords. Only rhythm  
is played where you input the rests, and then chord play starts  
after the rests.  
3 Make the following settings.  
Tone number  
Recording Multiple Tracks  
Track 1 of the keyboard s song m em ory record s Au to  
Accompaniment and keyboard play. In addition, there are  
five other melody tracks that you can use to record melody  
parts only. You can record different tones to the melody tracks  
and build a full ensemble of instruments for your recordings.  
The procedure you use for recording to Tracks 2 through 6 is  
identical to the one you use when recording to Track 1.  
Tempo  
4 Press the START/STOP button to start recording.  
At this time, the contents of any tracks that are already  
recorded start to play back.  
Op tion al p ed al, p itch ben d an d m u d u lation  
operations are also recorded.  
5 Use the keyboard to play what you want to record  
the track you selected.  
6 Press the START/STOP button to end recording  
when you are finished.  
735A-E-069A  
E-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Song Memory Function  
SONG MEMORY  
CURSOR  
Number buttons  
START/STOP  
SONG MEMORY TRACK  
2 Use the SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons to select  
Track Contents After Real-time  
Recording  
In addition to keyboard notes, the following data is also  
recorded to the selected track during real-time recording. This  
data is applied whenever the track is played back.  
the track you want to record to (2 through 6).  
Example: Select Track 2.  
Flash  
Tone number  
Pedal operations (option)  
The following data is recorded in the header whenever you  
start a recording of a track.  
3 Specify a tone number.  
Pressing a TONE button or the DRAWBAR ORGAN  
button displays the tone number and name on the  
display. You can then use the number buttons, or the  
[+] (increase) and [] (decrease) buttons to change the  
tone.  
Mixer settings of other tracks  
Effect type  
Accompaniment volume  
Reverb Level  
Chorus Level  
DSP Hold On/ Off  
After changing the tone number, press any keyboard  
key to clear the tone number and name screen, and  
return to the note input screen.  
Mixer Hold On/ Off  
Pitch bend wheel operation  
Modulation wheel operation (WK-3500)  
Mudulation button operation (WK-3000)  
Pitch bend range  
4 Use the keyboard keys to input notes, or the [0]  
button to input rests.  
At this time, the display shows the keyboard pressure  
(velocity). Use the [+] (increase) and [] (decrease)  
buttons to change the velocity.  
To record to Tracks 2 through 6 using  
step recording  
This procedure describes how to input notes one-by-one,  
specifying each notes pitch and length.  
You can also input a chord.  
5 Use the number buttons to input the length of the  
note or rest (page E-66).  
1 Press the SONG MEMORY button three times to  
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to input more notes.  
enter real-time record standby, and then use the  
7 Press the START/STOP button to end recording  
number buttons to select a song number (0 to 4).  
The song number you select should be the one where  
you previously input Track 1.  
when you are finished.  
p
S t e Re c  
E-68  
735A-E-070A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Song Memory Function  
NOTE  
To correct mistakes while step  
recording  
Use the procedure under Correcting Mistakes While  
Step Recordingon this page to correct input mistakes  
you make during step recording.  
You can add on to a track that already contains recorded  
data by selecting that track in step 2 of the above  
procedure. Doing so automatically locates the step  
recording start point at the first beat immediately  
following the previously recorded data.  
1 Without exiting step recording, use the [̇]  
CURSOR button to move the input point to the left.  
The REC indicator disappears from the display, and  
the STEP indicator flashes.  
Whenever you are recording to Tracks 2 through 6, the  
entire keyboard functions as a melody keyboard,  
regardless of the current MODE button setting.  
N o t e C # 4  
Track Contents After Step Recording  
Measure 126/Beat 3/Clock 48  
(Normal input point)  
Measure 126/Beat 3/Clock 0  
(Previous data)  
In addition to notes and rests, the following data is also  
recorded to the track during step recording. This data is  
applied whenever the track is played back.  
Data flow  
Data flow  
•••••••  
•••••••  
•••••••  
•••••••  
ꢂꢃ  
ꢂꢃ  
Tone number  
C 4  
C 4  
Press [̇] CURSOR ❛ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃ.  
Use [̇] and [̈] CURSOR  
❛ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄ to move left and right.  
Level Meter Contents During Record/  
Edit Standby  
Channels 11 through 16 correspond to Tracks 1 through 6.  
Whenever the keyboard is in record or edit (page E-70)  
standby, the level meter display shows which tracks already  
contain recorded data and which are still empty. Tracks with  
four lit segments already contained recorded data, while  
tracks with one lit segment are not yet recorded.  
2 Monitoring the data on the display, use [̇] and  
[̈] CURSOR to move the input point to the data  
you want to change.  
Example: To re-record all note data following the note  
A3 located at Measure 120, Beat 1, Clock 0.  
N o t e A 3  
Recording track  
Not recording track  
Correcting Mistakes While Step  
Recording  
Measure 120/Beat 1/Clock 0  
(Input point moved to using [̇] and [̈] CURSOR ❛ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄ  
)
Data flow  
Memory data can be thought of as a musical score that  
progresses from left to right, with the input point normally  
at the far right of the recorded data.  
The procedure described here lets you move the input point  
to the left in order to make changes in data you have already  
input. Note, however, that moving the input point to the left  
and changing data automatically deletes all of the data  
recorded to the right of the input point.  
•••••••  
•••••••  
ꢂꢃ  
A3  
C 4  
3 Press the [̄] CURSOR button.  
Rew r i t e ?  
735A-E-071A  
E-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Song Memory Function  
SONG MEMORY  
CURSOR  
[+] []  
/
YES/NO  
START/STOP  
SONG MEMORY TRACK  
4 Press the YES button.  
Editing Memory Contents  
This deletes all data from the location you specified  
and enters step record standby.  
After you record to keyboard m em ory, you can recall  
ind ivid ual notes and param eter settings (such as tone  
number) and make any changes you want. This means you  
can correct misplayed notes, make changes in tone selections,  
etc.  
Pressing the [̆] CURSOR button or the NO button  
cancels deleting the data.  
Measure 120/Beat 1/Clock 0  
(
)
Step re-recording begins from here.  
The following types of data can be edited.  
Data flow  
Note intensity  
Notes  
Chords  
All data to  
the right  
is deleted.  
•••••••  
Tone numbers  
Rhythm number  
INTRO/ ENDING 1 button, INTRO/ ENDING 2 button,  
VARIATION/ FILL-IN 1 button, VARIATION/ FILL-IN 2  
button, SYNCHRO/ FILL-IN NEXT button operations  
NOTE  
When you reach the end of the recording by pressing  
the [̈] CURSOR button, the RECindicator appears  
and the STEPindicator flashes on the display,  
indicating that you can add more data using step  
recording.  
To edit memory contents  
1 Press the SONG MEMORY button three times to  
enter step recording standby, and then use the [+]  
and [] buttons to select a song number (0 to 4).  
To delete specific note data  
Flash  
1 Perform steps 1 and 2 under To correct mistakes  
while step recordingabove to display the note you  
want to delete.  
p
S t e  
Re c  
2 Press the [̄] CURSOR button twice.  
3 In response to the Delete?message that appears  
on the screen, press the YES button to delete the  
displayed note.  
2 Use the SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons to select  
the recorded track that you want to edit.  
3 Press the [̇] CURSOR button to enter the editing  
mode.  
The REC indicator disappears from the display, and  
the STEP indicator flashes.  
E-70  
735A-E-072A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Song Memory Function  
4 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to move to  
the location in track where the note or parameter  
you want to change is located.  
Editing Techniques and Display  
Contents  
The following describes the editing techniques you can use  
to change the various parameters stored in memory.  
Note editing example  
Velocity  
Pitch  
Parameter being  
edited  
To change the key pressure (velocity) of a note  
Use the number buttons or [+] and [] to adjust the key  
N o t e C 4  
pressure.  
No t e G4  
To change the pitch of a note  
5 Make any changes in the value that you want.  
The actual procedures you use to change a parameter  
depend on the type of data it contains. See Editing  
Techniques and Display Contentson this page for  
details.  
Input a new note on the keyboard or use [+] and [] buttons  
to change the pitch of a note. The pitch you specify here is  
reflected in the keyboard and the notes shown in the staff on  
the display.  
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to edit other parameters.  
No t e G4  
7 Press the START/STOP button to end editing when  
IMPORTANT!  
you are finished.  
Whenever editing memory contents, never change a  
note so it is identical to the note before or after it. Doing  
so may alter the length of the changed note and the  
note before or after it. Should this happen, you will have  
to re-record the entire track.  
NOTE  
The only parameters that can be editted for Tracks 2  
through 6 are notes and tone numbers.  
In the case of real-time recording, you later can change  
tone numbers you specified while recording to Tracks 1  
through 6 is in progress.  
You can only change tone numbers that were originally  
set for Tracks 2 through 6 using step recording.  
In the case of real-time recording, you later can change  
rhythm numbers you specified while recording to Track  
1 is in progress.  
To change a chord  
Use the chord fingering method selected by the MODE button  
(Fingered, CASIO Chord, etc.) to input a chord.  
C h o r d  
You can only change rhythm numbers that were originally  
set for Track 1 using step recording.  
You cannot use the edit procedure to add more data to  
a recording.  
You cannot move portions of a recording to a different  
location within the recording.  
Note lengths cannot be changed.  
To change a tone number  
Use the number buttons or [+] and [] buttons to change a  
tone number.  
G r a n d P n o  
735A-E-073A  
E-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Song Memory Function  
SONG MEMORY  
CURSOR  
[+] []  
/
YES/NO  
SONG MEMORY TRACK  
NOTE  
Editing a Song  
You can perform the following operations in the song editing  
In the case of real-time recording, you later can change  
tone numbers you specified while recording to Tracks 1  
through 6 is in progress.  
mode.  
You can only change tone numbers that were originally  
set for Tracks 2 through 6 using step recording.  
Delete a song  
Delete a track  
Song header data rewrite (Panel Record)  
To change a rhythm number  
To delete a song  
Use the number buttons or [+] and [] buttons to change a  
rhythm number.  
1 Press the SONG MEMORY button once to enter  
playback standby.  
p
P o  
2 Use the [+] and [] buttons to select the number of  
the song you want to delete.  
NOTE  
In the case of real-time recording, you later can change  
rhythm numbers you specified while recording to Track  
1 is in progress.  
3 Press the [̄] CURSOR button. If there is no song  
number on the display, press the [̄] CURSOR  
You can only change rhythm numbers that were originally  
set for Track 1 using step recording.  
button twice.  
This displays the song delete screen.  
4 Press the YES button.  
This causes the message Sure?to appear, confirming  
whether you really want to delete the song.  
To change a rhythm controller operation*  
* INTRO/ ENDING 1 button, INTRO/ ENDING 2 button,  
VARIATION/ FILL IN 1 button, VARIATION/ FILL IN 2  
button, SYNCHRO/ FILL IN NEXT button operations  
Press the rhythm controller button you want to change to.  
5 Press the YES button to delete the song and return  
to playback standby.  
I n t / E n d 1  
E-72  
735A-E-074A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Song Memory Function  
To rewrite song header data (Panel  
Record)  
To delete a specific track  
1 Press the SONG MEMORY button once to enter  
You can use a procedure called Panel Recordto change the  
initial Mixer, tempo and other settings stored in the song  
header.  
playback standby.  
2 Use the [+] and [] buttons to select the number of  
1 Press the SONG MEMORY button once to enter  
the song that contains the track you want to delete.  
playback standby.  
3 Press the [̄] CURSOR button twice. If there is no  
2 Use the [+] and [] buttons to select the number of  
the song that contains the header data you want to  
rewrite.  
song number on the display, press the [̄] CURSOR  
button three times.  
This displays the song delete screen.  
Number of the song that contains the track  
(cannot be changed)  
3 Make the changes you want to the header data.  
Track delete standby  
4 Press the [̄] CURSOR button three times.  
This displays the song delete screen.  
T r . De l . ?  
5 Press the YES button to rewrite the header data.  
4 Use the SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons to select  
the recorded track or tracks whose data you want  
to delete.  
Track delete standby  
Recorded track  
Track being deleted (Multiple  
tracks can be specified.)  
You can specify more than one track for deletion by  
pressing more than one track select button.  
To deselect a track, simply press its track select button  
again.  
5 Press the YES button.  
This causes the message Sure?to appear, confirming  
whether you really want to delete the track.  
6 Press the YES button to delete the track.  
NOTE  
You cannot change the song number while in track delete  
standby.  
Pressing the SONG MEMORY button while in track  
delete standby returns to record standby.  
735A-E-075A  
E-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Settings  
SPLIT  
LAYER  
2 Press the LAYER button.  
Parts  
Selected layer tone  
Lit  
Up to four parts (num bered 1 through 4) can be used  
simultaneously during keyboard play. These parts can be  
used by the layer and split functions explained below.  
g
S t r i n s 1  
Part 1: Main tone part  
Part 2: Layered tone part  
Part 3: Split tone part  
3 Select the layered tone.  
Part 4: Layered and split tone part  
Example: To select 360 FRENCH HORN GMas the  
layered tone, use the number buttons to in-  
put 3, 6 and then 0.  
Using Layer  
Layer lets you assign two different tones (a main tone and a  
layered tone) to the keyboard, both of which play whenever  
you press a key. For example, you could layer the FRENCH  
HORN GM tone on the BRASS GM tone to produce a rich  
and brassy sound.  
F r . Ho r nG  
4 Now try playing something on the keyboard.  
LAYER  
Both tones are played at the same time.  
5 Press the LAYER button again to unlayer the tones  
and return the keyboard to normal.  
NOTE  
Main Tone (BRASS GM) + Layered Tone (FRENCH HORN GM)  
Turning on layering switches the currently selected part  
from Part 1 to Part 2, and displays the layered tone. At  
that time, you can use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons  
to switch between parts. Turning off layering returns to  
Part 1.  
To layer tones  
The main tone sounds over Channel 1, while the layered  
tone sounds over Channel 2. You can also use the Mixer  
to change the tone and volume settings for these  
channels.  
1 First select the main tone.  
Example: To select 361 BRASS GMas the main tone,  
press the TONE button and then use the num-  
ber buttons to input 3, 6 and then 1.  
Note that layering is not possible during record standby  
or recording in the Song Memory Mode, or while you  
are using the SMF Player Mode.  
_
B r a s s G  
E-74  
735A-E-076A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Settings  
4 Specify the split point. While holding down the  
Using Split  
SPLIT button, press the keyboard key where you  
With split you can assign two different tones (a main tone  
and a split tone) to either end of the keyboard, which lets  
you play one tone with your left hand and another tone with  
your right hand. For example, you could select STRINGS 1as  
the main (high range) tone and PIZZICATO GM as the split  
(low range) tone, putting an entire string ensemble at your  
fingertips.  
Split also lets you specify the split point, which is the loca-  
tion on the keyboard where the changeover between the two  
tones occurs.  
want the leftmost key of the high end range to be.  
Example: To specify G3 as the split point, press the G3  
key.  
G3  
5 Now try playing something on the keyboard.  
Every key from F 3 and below is assigned the  
NOTE  
PIZZICATO GM tone, while every key from G3 and  
above is assigned the STRINGS 1 tone.  
Leave the MODE button in the NORMAL or FULL  
RANGE CHORD position.  
6 Press the SPLIT button again to unsplit the keyboard  
and return it to normal.  
SPLIT  
NOTE  
Turning on split switches the currently selected part to  
Part 3, and displays the split tone. At that time, you can  
use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to switch between  
parts. Turning off split returns to Part 1.  
The main tone sounds over Channel 1, while the split  
tone sounds over Channel 3. You can also use the Mixer  
to change the tone and volume settings for these  
channels.  
Split Tone  
(PIZZICATO GM)  
Main Tone (STRINGS 1)  
Split point  
Note that split is not possible during record standby or  
recording in the Song Memory Mode, or while you are  
using the SMF Player Mode.  
When the MODE button is set to CASIO CHORD or  
FINGERED, the accompaniment keyboard range is in  
accordance with the split point you specify with the above  
procedure.  
To split the keyboard  
1 First select the main tone.  
Example: To select 348 STRINGS 1as the main tone,  
press the TON E button and then use the  
number buttons to input 3, 4 and then 8.  
g
S t r i n s 1  
2 Press the SPLIT button.  
Selected split tone  
Lit  
_
A c o . B s G  
3 Select the split tone.  
Example: To select 345 PIZZICATO GMas the split  
tone, use the number buttons to input 3, 4 and  
then 5.  
_
P i z z G  
735A-E-077A  
E-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Settings  
TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION  
TONE  
[+] []  
/
SPLIT  
LAYER  
To split the keyboard and then layer  
tones  
Using Layer and Split Together  
You can use layer and split together to create a layered split  
keyboard. It makes no difference whether you layer tones  
first and then split the keyboard, or split the keyboard and  
then layer tones. When you use layer and split in combination,  
the high range of the keyboard is assigned two tones (main  
tone + layered tone), and the low range two tones (split tone  
+ layered split tone).  
1 Press the TONE button and then input the tone  
number of the main tone.  
Example: To set 361 BRASS GMas the main tone.  
_
B r a s s G  
LAYER SPLIT  
2 Press the SPLIT button and then input the number  
of the split tone.  
Example: To set 345 PIZZICATO GMas the split tone.  
(PIZZICATO GM)  
+
(BRASS GM)  
+
Split Tone  
Main Tone  
Layered Split Tone  
(STRINGS1)  
Layered Tone (FRENCH HORN GM)  
_
P i z z G  
Split point  
After specifying the split tone, press the SPLIT button  
to unsplit the keyboard.  
3 Press the LAYER button and then input the number  
of the layered tone.  
Example: To set 360 FREN CH H ORN GMas the  
layered tone.  
F r . Ho r nG  
4 Press the SPLIT button or the LAYER button so both  
of the SPLIT and LAYER indicators are displayed.  
E-76  
735A-E-078A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Settings  
5 Input the number of the layered split tone.  
Example: To specify the 348 STRINGS 1tone, enter 3,  
4, 8.  
Transposing the Keyboard  
Transpose lets you raise and lower the overall key of the  
keyboard in sem iton e u n its. If you w an t to p lay an  
accompaniment for a vocalist who sings in a key thats  
d ifferent from the keyboard , for exam p le, sim p ly u se  
transpose to change the key of the keyboard.  
g
S t r i n s 1  
To transpose the keyboard  
6 While holding down the SPLIT button, press the  
keyboard key where you want the lowest note (the  
leftmost key) of the upper range (right side range)  
to be.  
1 Press the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button.  
This causes a pointer to appear on the display next to  
TRAN SPOSE/ FUN CTION , an d d isp lays th e  
transpose setting screen.  
7 Play something on the keyboard.  
Press the LAYER button to unlayer the keyboard, and  
the SPLIT button to unsplit it.  
T r a n s .  
NOTE  
Turning on layer+split switches the currently selected  
part to Part 4, and displays the layered tone. At that  
time, you can use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to  
switch between parts. Turning off layer returns to Part  
3, while turning off split returns to part 2. Turning off  
both layer and split returns to Part 1.  
2 Use [+] and [] to change the transpose setting of  
the keyboard.  
Example: To transpose the keyboard five semitones  
upwards.  
The main tone sounds over Channel 1, the layer tone  
over Channel 2, the split tone over Channel 3, and the  
layer/split tone over Channel 4. You can also use the  
Mixer to change the tone and volume settings for these  
channels.  
T r a n s .  
Pressing the TRANSPOSE/ FUNCTION button exits  
the transpose screen.  
NOTE  
The keyboard can be transposed within a range of 24  
(two octave downwards) to +24 (two octave upwards).  
The transpose setting also affects playback from song  
memory and Auto Accompaniment.  
The allowable pitch range you can transpose within  
depends on the tone you are using. If a transpose  
operation causes a note to for the tone being used to be  
outside of the pitch range, the keyboard automatically  
plays the same note in the nearest octave that falls within  
the pitch range of the tone you are using.  
735A-E-079A  
E-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Settings  
TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION  
CURSOR  
[+] []  
/
Using Touch Response  
Tuning the Keyboard  
When touch response is turned on, the relative volume of  
sound output by the keyboard is varied in accordance with  
the amount of pressure applied, just like an acoustic piano.  
The tuning feature lets you fine tune the keyboard to match  
the tuning of another musical instrument.  
To tune the keyboard  
To turn touch response on and off  
1 Press the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button.  
1 Press the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button.  
This causes a pointer to appear on the display next to  
TRANSPOSE/ FUNCTION.  
2 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to display  
the tuning screen.  
2 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to display  
the touch response setting screen.  
T u n e  
T o u c h  
3 Use [+] and [] to change the tuning setting of the  
keyboard.  
Example: To lower the tuning by 20.  
3 Use the [+] and [] buttons to select the touch  
response sensitivity level.  
• “1outputs powerful sound even with light key  
pressure, while 3requires very heavy key pressure  
to output powerful sound.  
Pressin g [+] an d [] at th e sam e tim e retu rn s  
sensitivity to the 2setting.  
T u n e  
Pressing the TRANSPOSE/ FUNCTION button exits  
the transpose screen.  
When you select oFF, the tone does not change  
regardless of how much pressure you apply to the  
keyboard.  
NOTE  
The keyboard can be tuned within a range of 99 cents  
to +99 cents.  
NOTE  
*100 cents is equivalent to one semitone.  
The tuning setting also affects playback from song  
memory and Auto Accompaniment.  
Touch response not only affects the keyboards internal  
sound source, it also is output as MIDI data.  
Song Memory playback, accompaniment, and external  
MIDI note data does not affect the touch response  
setting.  
E-78  
735A-E-080A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Settings  
Changing Other Settings  
Setting Types  
The table below shows the parameters whose settings you can change.  
Setting menu  
Transpose  
(Trans.)  
Description  
Page  
Adjusts of overall keyboard tuning by semitone units.  
Selects the Auto Harmonize Type  
Specifies of how sound should change with keyboard pressure.  
Fine adjustment of overall keyboard tuning.  
Adjusts display brightness.  
E-77  
Auto Harmonize  
(AutoHarm)  
E-82  
E-78  
E-78  
E-82  
E-82  
E-82  
E-82  
E-82  
E-83  
Touch Response  
(Touch)  
Tune  
(Tune)  
Display  
(Contrast)  
Pedal  
(Jack)  
Assigns of effects to pedals.  
Mixer Hold  
(MixHold)  
Turns mixer hold on or off.  
DSP Hold  
(DSP Hold)  
Turn DSP hold on or off.  
MIDI  
(MIDI)  
MIDI settings  
Delete/ Initialize  
(Del/ Init)  
Initializes all settings to initial factory defaults, resets specific settings or deletes user  
rhythms.  
NOTE  
The above settings are all saved whenever you turn off the keyboard. For details, see Memory Contentson page E-18.  
MIDI settings and Delete/Initialize settings are disabled while you are using the SMF Player or Song Memory function.  
735A-E-081A  
E-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Settings  
To use the keyboard settings menu  
1 Press the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button.  
This causes a pointer to appear on the display next to TRANSPOSE/ FUNCTION.  
2 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons, and the [̆] and [̄] CURSOR buttons to recall the items whose settings  
you want to change.  
Tone selection screen  
TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION  
TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button  
button  
EXIT button  
*
[̈]  
[̈]  
[̈]  
[̈]  
[̈]  
[̇]  
[̇]  
[̇]  
[̇]  
[̇]  
[̈]  
[̈]  
[̇]  
[̇]  
[̄]  
[̆]  
MIDI setting  
[̈]  
[̈]  
[̈]  
[̈]  
[̇]  
[̇]  
[̇]  
[̇]  
[̄]  
[̆]  
Delete setting  
[̈]  
[̈]  
[̇]  
[̇]  
[̆]  
[̄]  
Initialize  
setting  
[̈]  
[̈]  
[̇]  
[̇]  
*
[̆] : [̆] CURSOR button  
[̄] : [̄] CURSOR button  
[̇] : [̇] CURSOR button  
[̈] : [̈] CURSOR button  
E-80  
735A-E-082A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Settings  
TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION  
CURSOR  
Number buttons  
[+] []  
/
YES/NO  
EXIT  
3 Use the [+] and [] buttons or the number buttons to change the values.  
Settings you make are applied even if you do not press the EXIT button.  
See the following section titled Setting Menu Itemsfor details on each setting.  
After making the settings you want, press the TRANSPOSE/ FUNCTION button or EXIT button to return to the tone or  
rhythm selection screen.  
In case of an delete or initialize procedure  
4 Press the YES button.  
This displays the user area number and data name of the data to be deleted.  
The data size value represents kilobyte units.  
5 Now use the number buttons, or the [+] (increase) and [] (decrease) buttons to select the data you want.  
6 Press the [̄] CURSOR button.  
This causes the message Sure?to appear, confirming whether you really want to perform the delete or initialize operation.  
7 Press the YES button to complete the operation.  
This performs the delete or initialize operation and returns to the step 5 screen.  
8 After making the settings you want, press the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button or EXIT button to return to the tone  
or rhythm selection screen.  
735A-E-083A  
E-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Settings  
Setting Menu Items  
{
Auto Harmonize Types  
You can select from among the 10 different types of auto harmonize listed below.  
Type  
(parameter Name)  
No.  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Duet1  
Adds a 1-part harmony to keyboard play.  
Duet2  
Adds a 1-part harmony to keyboard play. Duet2 harmony is more open than Duet1.  
Adds a country-flavor harmony to keyboard play.  
Country  
Octave  
Adds notes one octave below notes played on the keyboard.  
Adds fifth notes above notes played on the keyboard.  
5th  
3-Way Open  
3-Way Close  
Strings  
Adds two open harmony parts to notes played on the keyboard (creating three-part harmony).  
Adds two close harmony parts to notes played on the keyboard (creating three-part harmony).  
Adds harmony suitable for strings.  
Block  
Adds block chord notes.  
Big Band  
Adds harmony suitable for big band play.  
{
Other Settings  
Setting menu  
Range  
Default  
Description  
Contrast  
(Contrast)  
00 to 15  
07  
Adjusts display contrast.  
SUS  
SoS  
SFt  
SUS  
Assigns the sustain pedal effect to a pedal.  
Assigns the sostenuto pedal effect to a pedal.  
Assigns the soft pedal effect to a pedal.  
Assignable Jack  
(Jack)  
rhy  
Assigns the START/ STOP button function to a pedal.  
When Mixer Hold is turned on, the parameters of accompaniment  
p arts (Part 6 th rou gh Part 10) can n ot be m od ified by  
accompaniment data.  
Mixer Hold  
(MixHold)  
on/ oFF  
on/ oFF  
oFF  
oFF  
on: Current DSP line setting is maintained, even when the tone is  
DSP Hold  
(DSP Hold)  
changed.  
oFF: Changing the tone switches to the DSP line setting of the new  
tone.  
{
MIDI Setting  
Setting menu  
Range  
Default  
Description  
Keyboard Channel  
(Keybd Ch)  
01 to 16  
01  
Specifies the send channel for main tone play.  
Specifies whether accompaniment range MIDI Note On messages  
received from an external device should be interpreted as auto  
accompaniment chords.  
MIDI In Chord Judge  
(Chord)  
on/ oFF  
oFF  
Accomp/ Song MIDI Out  
(Ac/ SgOut)  
Specifies whether this keyboards auto accompaniment or song  
memory is sent as MIDI messages.  
on/ oFF  
on/ oFF  
oFF  
on  
Local Control Setting  
(Local)  
Specifies whether the keyboard should sound the parts played on  
it.  
Specifies the maximum change in a tone that can be applied using  
the PITCH BEND wheel. The setting range is 00 (no change) to 12  
(12 semitones).  
Pitch Bend Range  
(Bend)  
00 to 12  
12  
E-82  
735A-E-084A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Settings  
{
Delete/Initialize Settings  
Setting menu  
Range  
Default  
Description  
Deletes selected SMF data.  
SMF Delete  
User Rhythm Delete  
User Tone Delete  
Deletes selected user rhythm data.  
Deletes selected user tone data.  
Mixer Reset  
(InitMix?)  
Initializes parameters assigned by the Mixer or by input from an  
external sequencer.  
Parameter Reset  
(InitPar?)  
Initializes all parameters, except for the display contrast setting.  
System Reset  
(InitSys?)  
Initializes to initial factory defaults.  
Deletes all data in the user area.  
735A-E-085A  
E-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the SMF Player  
The letters SMFstand for Standard MIDI File, which is a file format that allows MIDI data to be shared between different  
software and sequencers. There are actually three SMF formats, named SMF 0, SMF 1, and SMF 2. This keyboard supports the  
SMF 0 format, which is the one that is most widely used today, and so all mentions of SMF datain this manual refer to SMF 0  
format data.  
SMF format music data can be stored in the keyboards built-in Flash memory. Data stored in Flash memory can be played back  
using the SMF Player Mode. You can also load SMF data from a SmartMedia card or floppy diskette into the keyboards user area  
and then play it back using the SMF Player Mode. The follow shows the maximum number of files that can be stored on each type  
of media.  
Flash Memory: 200 files*  
SmartMedia Card: 255 files*  
Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 only): 112 (2DD diskette)* or 224 (2HD diskette)*  
* Note that the number of files you can store in also depends on the size of each file. If your files are very large, you may be able  
to store fewer than the number of files indicated above.  
IMPORTANT!  
Note that CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. shall not be held liable for any loss of data stored in Flash memory, or on a  
SmartMedia card or a floppy diskette (WK-3500 only).  
E-84  
735A-E-086A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the SMF Player  
SMF Player Mode Operational Flow  
Tone/Rhythm Selection Screen  
SMF PLAYER button  
SMF PLAYER button  
Select media.  
SMF Player indicator Lights  
[̆]*  
EXIT button  
[̆]  
Select file name.  
S 1  
S 1  
S 1  
ABC1  
Playback Mode + File Name  
[̇], []  
Playback Mode + File Name  
[̇], []  
[̈]*, [+]  
ABC2  
START/STOP button  
[̈], [+]  
ABC3  
Playback Mode + File Name  
[̄]  
EXIT button, [̆]  
Select play along part.  
01  
04  
16  
Key Ch  
Key Ch  
Key Ch  
Part Number  
Part Number  
Part Number  
[̈], [+]  
[̇], []  
START/STOP button  
EXIT button  
[̈], [+]  
[̇], []  
Direct input using number buttons is also possible.  
[̄]  
[̆]  
Select playback mode.  
S 1  
S L  
A 1  
A L  
PlayMode  
[̈], [+]  
PlayMode  
[̈], [+]  
PlayMode  
[̈], [+]  
PlayMode  
Playback Mode  
[̇], []  
Playback Mode  
[̇], []  
Playback Mode  
[̇], []  
Playback Mode  
START/STOP button  
EXIT button  
[̄]  
Select output mode.  
[̆]  
Note  
You can use the [  
], [ ], [ ] buttons to  
̈],  
[
̇
+
int  
Output  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
control SMF play back.  
START/STOP button  
EXIT button  
[̈], [+]  
[̇], []  
out  
Output  
START/STOP button, Playback complete.  
Select music  
04  
ABC 1  
Part Number + File Name  
Playback stopped.  
*
Error (Other errors may also occur.)  
[̆] : [̆] CURSOR button  
[̄] : [̄] CURSOR button  
[̇] : [̇] CURSOR button  
[̈] : [̈] CURSOR button  
Data is SMF but not SMF0  
EXIT button  
Err  
Not SMF0  
SMF0 error appears  
Data error appears  
Data is not correct SMF  
Err WrongDat  
735A-E-087A  
E-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the SMF Player  
SMF PLAYER  
CURSOR  
Number buttons  
[+] []  
/
ACCOMP VOLUME  
START/STOP  
EXIT  
To play back an SMF  
Playing Back an SMF  
Note that the first step you need to perform in the procedure  
below depends on whether you are playing back from Flash  
memory, a SmartMedia card, or a floppy diskette (WK-3500  
only).  
1 What you should do first depends on whether you  
are playing back from Flash memory, a memory  
card, or a floppy diskette.  
PREPARATION  
Flash Memory  
SmartMedia Card  
Insert the SmartMedia card that contains the data you  
want to play into the keyboards card slot.  
Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)  
Insert the floppy diskette that contains the data you  
want to play into the keyboards floppy disk drive.  
2-1 Use the SMF PLAYER button to display the  
Internalindicator in the text area of the screen.  
This causes the SMF PLAYERindicator to appear  
on the display.  
IMPORTANT!  
I n t e r n a l  
Never remove the SmartMedia card from the card slot  
or turn off the keyboard while card data is being accessed  
by a save, read, or delete operation. Doing so can corrupt  
the data on the SmartMedia card or even damage the  
card slot.  
Before ejecting a diskette, always check to make sure  
that the access lamp is not lit or flashing. A lit or flashing  
access lamp means that the keyboard is performing a  
data read or write operation. Ejecting a diskette while it  
is being accessed can cause its data to become  
corrupted.  
SmartMedia Card  
2-2 Insert the SmartMedia card that contains the file  
you want to play into the keyboards card slot.  
Use the SMF PLAYER button to display the Card”  
indicator in the text area of the screen.  
This causes the SMF PLAYERindicator to appear  
on the display.  
Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 only)  
2-3 Insert the floppy diskette that contains the file  
you want to play into the keyboards floppy disk  
drive. Use the SMF PLAYER button to display the  
Diskindicator in the text area of the screen.  
This causes the SMF PLAYERindicator to appear  
on the display.  
3 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to display the file  
selection screen.  
SMFs are those show s file nam es end w ith the  
extension MID. An error message appears at this  
time if there are no SMF files currently in Flash  
Memory.  
E-86  
735A-E-088A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the SMF Player  
4 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons or the [+]  
Configuring Other Settings  
and [] buttons to select the file you want to play.  
The name of the currently selected file appears in the  
text area of the display. The playback mode is shown  
in the number area of the d isplay. The Tempo/  
Measure area of the display shows the size of the file  
in kilobytes.  
To configure other settings  
1 Select the file you want to play back.  
Perform steps 1 through 3 under To play back an  
SMFto select a file.  
5 Press the START/STOP button  
This starts playback of the selected file.  
2 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to display a screen  
The number area of the display shows the number of  
the part to be played manually on the keyboard.  
You can use the TEMPO buttons adjust the tempo  
within the range of 30 to 255.  
You can turn channels 1 through 16 on and off,  
regardless of whether file playback is in progress or  
stop p ed . For m ore in form ation , see Tu rn in g  
Channels On and Offon page E-47.  
for selecting the part you want to play on the  
keyboard (play along part).  
Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons or the [+] and  
[] buttons to select the play along part.  
You can specify the part you want to play on the  
keyboard (the play-along part) as a value in the range  
of 1 through 16.  
After specifying a part, turn off the channel that  
corresponds to the play-along part you selected. See  
Turning Channels On and Offon page E-47 for more  
inform ation. Perform ing this step tu rns off the  
applicable part so you can play it on the keyboard  
along with the rest of the SMF playback.  
6 To stop file playback, press the START/STOP button  
again.  
Adjusting SMF Playback Volume  
The following procedure explains how to control the overall  
volume of SMF data playback. You can adjust volume while  
playback is stopped or ongoing.  
NOTE  
Entering the SMF Player Mode initializes all parts by  
turning on all Mixer Mode channels.  
1 Press the ACCOMP VOLUME button.  
This causes the SMF Vol.indicator to appear on the  
display, along with a value that indicates the current  
SMF volume setting.  
3 Press the [̄] CURSO R button to display the  
playback mode selection screen. Use the [̇] and  
[̈] CURSOR buttons or the [+] and [] buttons to  
select the playback mode.  
2 Use the [+] and [] buttons or the number buttons  
to adjust the SMF volume.  
You can select from among the following four playback  
modes.  
You can sp ecify a settin g in th e ran ge of 000  
(minimum) to 127 (maximum).  
Pressing [+] and [] at the same time returns the SMF  
volume setting to 100.  
Note that this setting does not affect the volume of  
the notes you play on the keyboard.  
S1 : One file, one time  
SL : One file, repeat  
A1 : All files, one time  
AL : All files, repeat  
4 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to display the output  
mode selection screen.  
Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons or the [+] and  
[] buttons to select the output mode.  
You can select from among the following two output  
types.  
int : Keyboards built-in speakers  
out : MIDI OUT  
NOTE  
Layer, split, andAuto Harmonize are automatically turned  
off in the SMF Player Mode.  
735A-E-089A  
E-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the SMF Player  
SMF Player Error Messages  
The following explains what you should do when an error message appears in the SMF Player Mode.  
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Err Not SMF0  
You are attempting to play SMF data that is  
not Format 0.  
Use only Format 0 SMF data.  
Err WrongDat  
There is a problem with the SMF data you are  
trying to play or the data is corrupted.  
Use different data.  
E-88  
735A-E-090A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI  
What is MIDI?  
MIDI Channels  
MIDI allows you to send the data for multiple parts at the  
same time, with each part being sent over a separate MIDI  
channel. There are 16 MIDI channels, numbered 1 through  
16, and MIDI channel data is always included whenever you  
exchange data (key press, pitch bend operation, etc.).  
Both the sending device and the receiving machine must be  
set to the same channel for the receiving device to correctly  
receive and play data. If the receiving device is set to Channel  
2, for example, it receives only MIDI Channel 2 data, and all  
other channels are ignored.  
This keyboard is equipped with multi-timbre capabilities,  
w hich means it can receive messages over all 16 MIDI  
channels and play up to 16 parts at the same time. Tone and  
volume settings for each channel can be made using the  
keyboards onboard Mixer, or by an external source that sends  
required MIDI control messages.  
The letters MIDI stand for Musical Instrum ent Digital  
Interface, which is the name of a worldwide standard for  
d igital signals and connectors that make it possible to  
exchange musical data between musical instruments and  
computers (devices) produced by different manufacturers.  
MIDI compatible equipment can exchange keyboard key  
press, key release, tone change, and other data as messages.  
Though you do not need any special knowledge about MIDI  
to use this keyboard as a stand-alone unit, MIDI operations  
require a bit of specialized knowledge. This section provides  
you with an overview of MIDI that will help to get you going.  
MIDI Connections  
MIDI messages are send out through the MIDI OUT terminal  
of one device to the MIDI IN terminal of another machine  
over a MIDI cable. To send a message from this keyboard to  
another device, for example, you must use a MIDI cable to  
connect the MIDI OUT terminal of this keyboard to the MIDI  
IN terminal of the other device. To send MIDI messages back  
to this keyboard, you need to use a MIDI cable to connect the  
other devices MIDI OUT terminal to the MIDI IN terminal  
of this keyboard.  
To use a computer or other MIDI device to record and  
playback the MIDI data produced by this keyboard, you must  
connect the MIDI IN and MIDI OUT terminals of both devices  
in order to send and receive data.  
Keyboard operations performed on this keyboard is sent out  
by selecting a MIDI channel (1 to 16) and then sending the  
appropriate message.  
General MIDI  
General MIDI standardizes MIDI data for all sound source  
types, regardless of manufacturer. General MIDI specifies  
such factors as tone numbering, drum sounds, and available  
MIDI channels for all sound sources. This standard makes it  
possible for all MIDI equipment to reproduce the same  
nuances when playing General MIDI data, regardless of the  
manufacturer of the sound source.  
This keyboard supports General MIDI, so it can be used to  
play commercially available pre-recorded General MIDI data  
and General MIDI data send to it from a personal computer.  
See the Tone Liston page A-1 for details about the tones  
that are available with GM tones numbered 000 to 127.  
MIDI IN MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
MIDI OUT  
Computer etc.  
If a MIDI THRU function provided by the software is being  
run on a connected computer or other MIDI device, be sure  
to turn this keyboards Local Control Settingoff (page E-  
82).  
735A-E-091A  
E-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI  
Sending and Receiving MIDI  
Messages  
This keyboard can send notes you play on the keyboard, as  
well as auto accompaniment patterns and Song Memory  
playback as MIDI messages to another device.  
MIDI Settings  
You can change the settings of a number of parameters that  
control how MIDI messages are sent and received.  
MIDI Parameters  
You can use the parameter setting procedure (page E-80) to  
change the settings of the MIDI parameters described below.  
See pages E-80 to E-83 for details about the setting menu and  
procedure.  
MIDI Send Data  
Keyboard Play  
Each keyboard part (Channels 1 through 4) is sent over its  
own individual MIDI channel. When Auto Harmonize is  
turned on, harmonize notes are also sent over each individual  
MIDI channel.  
MIDI In Chord Judge  
This parameter determines whether note data received from  
an external d evice shou ld be interp reted as an au to  
accompaniment chord fingering. Turn on this parameter  
when you want to control auto accompaniment chords from  
a computer or other external device.  
Auto Accompaniment or Song Memory Play  
Each accompaniment part is sent over its own individual  
MIDI channel. The Accomp/ Song MIDI Outparameter  
(page E-82) is used to specify whether a part is sent.  
on: Cau ses n ote d ata in p u t th rou gh MIDI IN to be  
interpreted as auto accompaniment chord fingerings.  
The channel specified by the keyboard channel is used  
for specifying chords.  
oFF: Turns off MIDI In Chord Judge.  
MIDI Message Receive  
Multi Channel Receive  
The 16 mixer parts can be used to receive data over 16 MIDI  
message channels at the same time.  
Accomp/Song MIDI Out (Accompaniment/Song MIDI Out)  
Turn on this parameter when you want sound auto accom-  
paniment or Song Memory on an external devices sound  
source.  
on: Outputs auto accompaniment or Song Memory as MIDI  
Chord Changes when Using Auto Accompaniment  
MIDI messages received from an external device can be  
interpreted as chord changes as specified by the fingerings  
su p p orted by the au to accom p anim ent system of this  
keyboard. Use the MIDI In Chord Judgeparameter (page  
E-82) to turn this capability on and off.  
messages through the keyboards MIDI OUT terminal.  
oFF: Does not output auto accompaniment or Song Memory.  
NOTE  
For details about MIDI specifications, visit the CASIO  
Website.  
http://world.casio.com  
See the MIDI Implementation Chart at the back of this  
User s Guid e for more information about each MIDI  
message.  
E-90  
735A-E-092A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI  
Using the Data Download Service  
You can download the following type of data from CASIO  
MUSIC SITE (http:/ / music.casio.com) to your computer, and  
then transfer it to the keyboard.  
To connect to a computer  
Be sure to turn off the keyboard and your computer before  
connecting them. You should also set the volume controller  
of the keyboard to a relatively low volume.  
Tones  
1 Connect the keyboards MIDI interface to your  
Tones with waves  
Drum sets with waves  
DSP  
computers MIDI interface.  
Rhythms  
Registrations  
Songs  
CASIO MUSIC SITE  
SMF  
Package File Data  
Internet  
Service  
Provider  
Data and Application Software  
Data itself as well as application software for transferring data  
between your computer and the keyboard are available for  
download at the CASIO MUSIC SITE.  
Application Software  
You can run the application software on your computer and  
transfer data you download from the CASIO MUSIC SITE to  
the keyboard, and also use your computers hard disk for  
long-term storage of data you transfer from the keyboard to  
your computer.  
OUT IN  
See the instructions provided at the CASIO MUSIC SITE  
for full information about how to download the application  
software and data.  
See the application softwares online help for information  
about how to use the software.  
MIDI Interface  
MIDI IN  
MIDI OUT  
* CASIO MUSIC SITE  
http://music.casio.com/  
1 Go to the above URL.  
2 Turn on the keyboard, and then turn on your  
computer or other connected device.  
2 Select a region or country.  
3 Start up the software you want to use on your  
3 Select a download service for the INTERNET DATA  
computer.  
EXPANSION SYSTEM data.  
Note that the service you should use depends on the  
area or country.  
NOTE  
When using the application software, make sure that  
the tone setting screen (the screen that appears after  
turning on power) is on the keyboards display screen.  
735A-E-093A  
E-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Data  
You can save data you create and data you transfer to the keyboard from a computer to the keyboards built-in Flash memory, or  
to a SmartMedia cardTM or floppy diskette (WK-3500). In this manual, SmartMedia cards and floppy diskettes are referred to as  
external storage media.  
The types of files that can be saved to external storage media are listed below. Note that each type of file can be saved to a specific,  
pre-defined user area, as shown in the Savable File Typestable below.  
After you load SMF data from external storage media and store it in a user area, you can play it back using the SMF Player Mode.  
See Using the SMF Playeron page E-84 for more information.  
Savable File Types  
Display  
Indicator  
User Memory  
Capacity  
File Name  
Extension  
Type  
Saved Data  
1 Tune  
SMF  
Smf  
200  
16  
8
MID  
Z00  
Z01  
Z02  
Z03  
Z04  
Z05  
Z06  
Z07  
Z08  
Z09  
Rhythm Pattern  
Registration  
Pattern  
Regist  
Song  
1 Pattern  
1 Bank  
1 Tune  
1 Set  
User song created in the Song Memory Mode  
5
Drum sound with waves  
Drawbar organ tone  
Tone  
Tn wave  
Drawbar  
Tone  
4
1 Tone  
1 Tone  
1 Tone  
1 Type  
1 Pack  
100  
100  
20  
100  
1
Tone with waves  
DSP  
Package File*1  
All User Data*2  
Dr wave  
Dsp  
Package  
All Data  
*1: Package File  
A package file combines tone settings, DSP effect settings, and other setup data into a single file that you can manage and load as  
a unit (package). Once you create a package file, you will be able to change the entire setup of the keyboard by loading a single  
package file.  
To create a package file, you need to download special package file software from the CASIO Music Site (http:/ / music.casio.com/ )  
and install it on your computer. For details about the package file software, see the information provided at the CASIO Music  
Site.  
IMPORTANT!  
Loading a package file loads the setting data listed in the table under Package File Data Contentsinto the user area, and  
replaces all current data with the data in the package file.  
*2: SmartMedia card only  
Package File Data Contents  
Data Type  
User Area Number  
Last 10 Songs  
SMF  
Rhythm Patterns  
Registrations  
148 to 155 (8 rhythms)  
1 to 8 (8 banks)  
Drum Sound With Waves  
Drawbar Organ Tones  
Tones  
803 (1 set)  
190 to 199 (10 tones)  
690 to 699 (10 tones)  
710 to 719 (10 tones)  
190 to 199 (10 effects)  
Tones With Waves  
DSP  
E-92  
735A-E-094A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Data  
Using a SmartMedia Card  
SmartMedia Card and Card Slot  
Precautions  
Your keyboard is equipped with a card slot that supports the  
use of SmartMediaTM cards that you can use to store tunes  
you transfer from your computer, songs you have stored in  
the keyboards memory, and other data. This provides you  
with access to virtually unlimited volumes of data that you  
can instantly load whenever you need it.  
IMPORTANT!  
Be sure to carefully read all documentation that comes  
with the SmartMedia card for important information about  
how to handle it.  
Avoid storing and using SmartMedia cards in the  
following types of locations. Such conditions can cause  
corruption of data stored on the card.  
Areas subject to high temperatures, high humidity, or  
corrosive agents  
IMPORTANT!  
There are two types of SmartMedia cards: 3.3V and 5V.  
Note that this keyboard supports use of 3.3V type  
SmartMedia cards only.  
Never try to use a 5V type SmartMedia card with this  
keyboard.  
Areas subject to strong electrostatic charge or  
electrical noise  
Note you will not be able to store data to, delete data  
from, or rename a SmartMedia card that has a write  
protect sticker affixed to the cards write protect area.  
Whenever handling a SmartMedia card, make sure that  
you never touch its contacts with your fingers.  
If the data access lamp is lit and the message Pls Wait”  
is on the display, it means that data on the SmartMedia  
card is being accessed by a save, read, or delete  
operation. Never remove the SmartMedia card from the  
card slot or turn off the keyboard while the card is being  
accessed. Doing so can corrupt the data on the  
SmartMedia card or even damage the card slot.  
Never try to insert any type of card other than a 3.0V  
SmartMedia card into the card slot. Doing so can  
damage the keyboard.  
Contacts  
Write protect area  
Inserting a SmartMedia card that is charged with static  
electricity into the card slot can cause malfunction of  
the keyboard. If this happens, turn the keyboard off and  
then back on again.  
About SmartMediaTM Cards  
A SmartMedia card that has been in the card slot for a  
long time may feel hot when you remove it. This is normal  
and does not indicate malfunction.  
Note that a SmartMedia card has a limited service life.  
After long use, you may not be able to store data to,  
read data from, and/or delete data from a card. When  
this happens, you will need to purchase a new  
SmartMedia card.  
You can purchase SmartMedia cards at most household  
appliance stores, computer stores, etc.  
SmartMedia cards are commercially available in capacities  
ranging from 8MB up to 126MB.  
Though a SmartMedia card is about the size of a postage  
stamp, its capacity ranges from 8 to 100 times the capacity  
of a floppy diskette.  
The data read rate from a SmartMedia card is very fast.  
SmartMediaTM is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.  
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. assumes no responsibility  
for any loss or damage to you or any third party arising  
out of the loss or corruption of data.  
735A-E-095A  
E-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Data  
Using the Floppy Disk Drive  
(WK-3500 Only)  
Inserting and Removing a  
SmartMedia Card  
The following describes how to insert a SmartMedia card into  
the card slot and how to remove it.  
Floppy Disk Drive Features  
To insert a SmartMedia card into the card slot  
The WK-3500 com es w ith a bu ilt-in d isk d rive, w hich  
provides you with the capabilities described below.  
You can save song memory and synthesizer data on a floppy  
diskette for long-term storage. When you need the data  
again, simply insert the diskette into the disk drive and  
load it.  
With the contact sid e of the Sm artMed ia card facing  
downwards, insert the card into the card slot. Carefully push  
the card into the slot as far as it will go.  
You can play back SMF (standard MIDI file) data created  
on a personal computer and saved to diskette.  
Floppy Diskette Precautions  
IMPORTANT!  
Avoid the following locations when storing and using  
diskettes. Any of the conditions noted below can cause  
data stored on the diskette to become corrupted.  
Near TVs, on top of audio equipment, or in any area  
exposed to magnetism. Take special care to keep  
diskettes away from any source of magnetism.  
Areas exposed to direct sunlight, or subject to high  
humidity or temperature extremes.  
Failure to observe any of the following precautions can  
cause data stored on the diskette to become corrupted.  
Never try to take a diskette apart.  
Never open the shutter of the diskette or touch the  
film inside with your fingers.  
Never bend a diskette or otherwise subject it to rough  
handling.  
Affix labels in the spaces provided only, and do not  
affix labels on top of previous ones.  
To remove a SmartMedia card from the slot  
After making sure that the data access lamp is not lit and the  
message Pls Waitis not on the display, carefully pull the  
card from the slot.*  
* Never remove the SmartMedia card from the card slot or  
turn off the keyboard card while any of the following  
conditions exists.  
While the keyboard is in the SMF Player Mode and there  
is a pointer next to CARD on the display  
While the data access lamp is lit and the message Pls  
Waitis on the display, indicating that a card access  
operation is being performed  
IMPORTANT!  
Never remove the SmartMedia card from the card slot  
or turn off the keyboard while card data is being accessed  
by a save, read, or delete operation. Doing so can corrupt  
the data on the SmartMedia card or even damage the  
card slot.  
Do not eject the diskette from the drive while the access  
lamp is lit or flashing or turn off keyboard power with a  
diskette in the drive. Doing either can cause data on the  
diskette to become corrupted and can even cause  
malfunction of the disk drive.  
Never insert any foreign objects into the disk drive. Doing  
so can cause it to malfunction.  
The disk drive uses a magnetic head.Adirty head cannot  
read data from a diskette properly and can corrupt  
existing data on the diskette. To avoid this, be sure to  
use a commercially available head cleaning diskette to  
periodically clean the head.  
E-94  
735A-E-096A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Data  
Do not use a computer, another electronic musical  
instrument, or any other device to change a file name or  
file contents created with this keyboard. Doing so can  
make the data unusable by this keyboard and even  
cause malfunction of the keyboard.  
Write Protection  
IMPORTANT!  
You can write protect a diskette so data on it cannot be  
deleted and no new data can be stored on the diskette.  
Also, a write protected diskette cannot be formatted. You  
can read data from a diskette regardless of whether or  
not it is write protected.  
Note that CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. shall not be held  
liable for any loss to you or any third party d ue to  
corruption or accidental erasure of data on a diskette.  
Write protect (hole open)  
Write enabled  
(hole blocked with tab)  
Data save, data delete,  
disk formatting are all  
enabled.  
About Floppy Diskettes  
This section contains important information about handling  
diskettes. Be sure to read it before going any further.  
Hole  
open  
Diskette Types  
Write protect tab  
The WK-3500 su p p orts u se of both 3.52H D (1.44MB  
formatted) and 2DD (720KB formatted) diskettes. Use of other  
disk sizes and capacities is not supported.  
When the write protect hole is open as shown in the  
illustration, you can read the contents of the diskette,  
but you cannot write data to or delete data from the  
diskette. After saving important data to a diskette, be  
sure to open its write protect hole to protect the data  
against accidental changes or deletion.  
The diskette that comes with the keyboard contains  
sample data and programs. It is write protected to avoid  
accidental erasure or formatting. Make sure you handle  
this diskette carefully to avoid damaging or erasing its  
data.  
Diskette Type Indicators  
2HD ...... A 2HD diskette is marked with the letters HDin  
the upper right corner of the front side. Also, there  
is a square hole in the lower right corner.  
2DD ....... This type of diskette does not have a hole in the  
lower right corner.  
HD  
735A-E-097A  
E-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Data  
Eject button  
CURSOR  
WK-3500  
DISK/CARD  
WK-3000  
CARD  
[+] []  
/
Inserting and Ejecting a Diskette  
Using External Storage Media  
The following describes how to insert a diskette into the disk  
drive and how to eject it.  
This section explains how to use SmartMedia cards and  
floppy diskettes (WK-3500 only) for data storage. In this  
m an u al, Sm artMed ia card s an d flop p y d iskettes are  
collectively referred to as external storage media.  
To insert a diskette into the floppy disk drive  
1 With the label area of the diskette facing up, insert  
the diskette shutter first into the disk drive, as shown  
in the illustration.  
NOTE  
Layer, split, andAuto Harmonize are automatically turned  
off while external storage is being used. Tone and rhythm  
selection, and rhythm playback are also all disabled.  
Basic SmartMedia Card Operation  
1 Insert the SmartMedia card into the card slot.  
2 Enter the Card Mode.  
* WK-3500  
Press the DISK/ CARD button twice.  
This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/  
CARD on the display, and also displays Cardin the  
displays text area.  
2 Slide the diskette into the drive as far as it will go,  
until it clicks into place.  
* WK-3000  
To eject a diskette from the floppy disk drive  
Press the CARD button.  
This causes a pointer to appear next to the CARD on  
the display, and also displays Cardin the displays  
text area.  
IMPORTANT!  
Before ejecting a diskette, always check to make sure  
that the access lamp is not lit or flashing. A lit or flashing  
access lamp means that the keyboard is performing a  
data read or write operation. Ejecting a diskette while it  
is being accessed can cause its data to become  
corrupted.  
3 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to display the Card  
Mode menu.  
1 Press the Eject button.  
This causes the diskette to be partially ejected from  
the disk drive.  
2 Remove the diskette from the drive by hand.  
E-96  
735A-E-098A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Data  
4 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to display  
the screen for the type of operation you want to  
perform.  
A Press the [̄] CURSOR button to load the file.  
This will display a confirmation message asking  
whether you really want to load the data. If you  
already have data in the user area, the message will  
ask if you want to overwrite the existing data with  
the loaded data.  
L
S
R
D
F
o
a d  
Press the YES button to load the data. This will cause  
the data access lamp to light and the message Pls  
Waitto appear on the display to indicate that a card  
access operation is being performed. Never try to  
perform any other operation on the keyboard while  
the card is being accessed. The message Complete”  
w ill appear on the d isplay after d ata load ing is  
complete. After a few seconds, the message will be  
replaced by the file name selection screen.  
If you do not want to continue with data loading, press  
the EXIT button or the NO button in response to the  
above confirmation message. This will return you to  
the user area selection screen in step 9.  
[̈]  
[̈]  
[̈]  
[̈]  
[̇]  
a
v e  
[̇]  
e
n ame  
l e t e  
r ma t  
[̇]  
e
[̇]  
B After you are finished performing the SmartMedia  
card operation you want, press the DISK/CARD  
button (CARD button on the WK-3000) to exit the  
o
See the pages referenced below for details about using  
each of the above menu operations.  
Card Mode.  
Exiting the Card Mode causes the pointer next to the  
displays DISK/ CARD pointer (CARD pointer on the  
WK-3000) to disappear.  
Loading a file (Crd Load):  
Saving a file (Crd Save):  
Renaming a file (Crd Rename):  
Deleting a file (Crd Delete):  
page E-99  
page E-98  
page E-100  
page E-101  
Basic Floppy Diskette Operation  
(WK-3500 Only)  
Formatting a SmartMedia card (Crd Format):page E-102  
5 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to advance to the  
file type selection screen.  
1 Insert a floppy diskette into the keyboards floppy  
disk drive.  
6Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to select the  
file type.  
2 Press the DISK/CARD button.  
This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/  
CARD on the display, and also displays Diskin the  
displays text area.  
Pressing the EXIT or [̄] CURSOR button at this time  
will return you to the Card Mode menu.  
7 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to display the file  
3 Perform the same operations as those starting from  
name selection screen.  
step 3 of under Basic SmartMedia Card Operation”  
8 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons or [+] and  
on page E-96.  
[] buttons to select the file name.  
Note that Disk Mode operations are indicated on the  
display by the prefix Fdin place of the Crdprefix  
of the Card Mode operations.  
Pressing the EXIT or [̆] CURSOR button at this time  
will return you to the file type selection screen.  
9 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to advance to the  
user area selection screen for file loading.  
0 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons or [+] and  
[] buttons to select the user area.  
Pressing the EXIT or [̆] CURSOR button at this time  
will return you to the file name selection menu.  
735A-E-099A  
E-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Data  
CURSOR  
WK-3500  
DISK/CARD  
WK-3000  
[+] []  
/
CARD  
YES/NO  
3 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to display  
Saving Files  
the Savescreen.  
You can use the procedures in this section to save Song  
Memory, Synthesizer, and other data you create to external  
storage med ia for later load ing w hen you need it. See  
Savable File Typeson page E-86 for information about the  
type of data you can save.  
4 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to advance to the  
file type selection screen.  
5 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to select the  
file type.  
PREPARATION  
SmartMedia Card  
6 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to advance to the  
Insert a properly formatted SmartMedia card into the  
keyboards card slot. Make sure that the sticker is  
removed from the cards write area, which enables  
writing.  
user area selection screen.  
7 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons or [+] and  
Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)  
[] buttons to select the user area you want.  
The numeric area of the display will show the user  
area number, while the text area will show the user  
area name.  
Insert a properly formatted floppy diskette into the  
keyboards floppy disk drive. Make sure that the  
diskettes write protect hole is closed, which enables  
writing.  
Pressing the EXIT or [̆] CURSOR button at this time  
will return you to the file type selection screen.  
To save a file to external storage media  
8 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to advance to the  
file name input screen.  
1 What you should do first depends on the type of  
Use the [+] and [] buttons to scroll through letters at  
the current cursor location. See the page E-103 for  
information about inputting text.  
Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to move the  
cursor left and right.  
external storage media you are using.  
SmartMedia Card:  
On the WK-3500 press the DISK/ CARD button twice.  
On the WK-3000, press the CARD button once.  
This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/  
CARD or CARD on the display, and also displays  
Cardin the displays text area.  
9 After inputting the file name, press the [̄] CURSOR  
button.  
Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only):  
If you are saving song data, the file type selection  
screen appears next. Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR  
buttons to select SMFor SONG. After selecting a  
file type, press the [̄] CURSOR button.  
This will display a confirmation message asking  
whether you really want to save the data. If you  
already have data in the user area, the message will  
ask if you want to overwrite the existing data with  
the loaded data.  
Press the DISK/ CARD button.  
This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/  
CARD on the display, and also displays Diskin  
the displays text area.  
2 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to display the Card  
Mode (or Disk Mode) menu.  
E-98  
735A-E-100A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Data  
To recall file data from external storage media  
0 Press the YES button to save the data. This will cause  
the data access lamp to light and the message Pls  
Waitto appear on the display to indicate that a  
card access operation is being performed. Never  
try to perform any other operation on the keyboard  
while the card is being accessed. The message  
Completewill appear on the display after data  
save is complete. After a few seconds, the message  
1 What you should do first depends on the type of  
external storage media you are using.  
SmartMedia Card  
On the WK-3500 press the DISK/ CARD button twice.  
On the WK-3000, press the CARD button once.  
This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/  
CARD or CARD on the display, and also displays  
Cardin the displays text area.  
Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)  
Press the DISK/ CARD button.  
This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/  
CARD on the display, and also displays Diskin  
the displays text area.  
will be replaced by the file name selection screen.  
If you do not want to continue with data save, press  
the EXIT button or the NO button in response to the  
above confirmation message. This will return you to  
the user area selection screen in step 7.  
A After you are finished performing the save  
operation, press the DISK/CARD button (CARD  
button on the WK-3000) to exit the Card Mode.  
2 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to display the Card  
Mode (or Disk Mode) menu.  
3 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to display  
the Loadscreen.  
Loading a File  
Use the procedures in this section when you want to load data  
4 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to advance to the  
file type selection screen.  
from external storage media into the keyboards user area.  
5 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to select the  
IMPORTANT!  
type file you want to load.  
Note the following important points whenever using the  
SMF Player Mode to play back data saved with the above  
procedure.  
6 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to display the file  
name selection screen.  
* SmartMedia Card  
7 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons or [+] and  
[] buttons to select the name of the file you want  
to load.  
To p erform the p roced u re below, you m u st have a  
SmartMedia card to which SMF data has been copied from  
a computer. Insert a SmartMed ia card that you have  
formatted on the keyboard into the SmartMedia card of  
your computer, and copy the SMF data you want to load  
into the directory named CASIO_MD. Note that you will  
not be able to load the data if it is not located inside the  
CASIO_MDdirectory. If you create a sub-directory inside  
of the CASIO_MDdirectory, the keyboard will not be  
able to load any data inside the sub-directory.  
8 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to advance to the  
user area selection screen.  
The user area selection screen will not appear if the  
file you selected in step 5 is a package file or All  
Datafile. In this case, skip step 9 and go directly to  
step 10.  
* Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 only)  
This keyboard is able to see only files that are in the top  
(root) directory of the floppy diskette. It will not be able to  
see any files that are located in a subdirectory.  
9 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons or [+] and  
[] buttons to select the user area to which you  
want to import the loaded file data.  
The numeric area of the display will show the user  
area number, while the text area will show the user  
area name.  
Pressing the EXIT or [̆] CURSOR button at this time  
will return you to the file type selection screen.  
PREPARATION  
SmartMedia Card  
Insert the SmartMedia card that contains the data you  
want to load into the keyboards card slot.  
Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)  
Insert the floppy diskette that contains the data you  
want to load into the keyboards floppy disk drive.  
735A-E-101A  
E-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Data  
CURSOR  
WK-3500  
DISK/CARD  
WK-3000  
[+] []  
/
CARD  
YES/NO  
0 After selecting the user area, press the [̄] CURSOR  
Renaming a File  
You can use the procedures in this section to change the name  
button.  
This will display a confirmation message asking  
whether you really want to load the data. If you  
already have data in the user area, the message will  
ask if you want to overwrite the existing data with  
the loaded data.  
of a file that you previously saved to external storage media.  
PREPARATION  
SmartMedia Card  
Insert the SmartMedia card that contains the file you  
want to rename into the keyboards card slot. Make  
sure that the sticker is removed from the cards write  
area, which enables writing.  
A Press the YES button to recall the data.  
This will cause the message Pls Waitto appear on  
the display to indicate that a card access operation is  
being performed. Never try to perform any other  
operation on the keyboard while the card is being  
accessed. The message Completewill appear on the  
display after data loading is complete. After a few  
seconds, the message will be replaced by the file name  
selection screen.  
Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)  
Insert the floppy diskette that contains the file you want  
to rename into the keyboards card slot. Make sure  
that the diskettes write protect hole is closed, which  
enables writing.  
If you do not want to continue with data loading, press  
the EXIT button or the NO button in response to the  
above confirmation message. This will return you to  
the user area selection screen in step 9.  
To rename a file saved to external storage media  
1 What you should do first depends on the type of  
external storage media you are using.  
SmartMedia Card  
B After you are finished performing the load  
operation, press the DISK/CARD button (CARD  
button on the WK-3000) to exit the Card Mode.  
On the WK-3500 press the DISK/ CARD button twice.  
On the WK-3000, press the CARD button once.  
This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/  
CARD or CARD on the display, and also displays  
Cardin the displays text area.  
Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)  
Press the DISK/ CARD button.  
This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/  
CARD on the display, and also displays Diskin  
the displays text area.  
2 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to display the Card  
Mode (or Disk Mode) menu.  
3 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to display  
the Renamescreen.  
4 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to advance to the  
file type selection screen.  
E-100  
735A-E-102A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Data  
5 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to select the  
Deleting a File  
You can perform the procedure in this section to delete a file  
type of the file you want to rename.  
from external storage media.  
6 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to display the file  
name selection screen.  
IMPORTANT!  
Note that the file delete operation cannot be undone.  
Make sure that you no longer need data before you  
delete it.  
7 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons or [+] and  
[] buttons to select the name of the file you want  
to rename.  
PREPARATION  
SmartMedia Card  
8 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to advance to the  
file name input screen.  
Insert the SmartMedia card that contains the file you  
want to delete into the keyboards card slot. Make sure  
that the sticker is removed from the cards write area,  
which enables writing.  
Use the [+] and [] buttons to scroll through letters at  
the current cursor location. See the page E-103 for  
information about inputting text.  
Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to move the  
cursor left and right.  
Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)  
Insert the floppy diskette that contains the file you want  
to delete into the keyboards floppy disk drive. Make  
sure that the diskettes write protect hole is closed,  
which enables writing.  
9 After inputting the file name, press the [̄] CURSOR  
button.  
This will display a confirmation message asking  
whether you really want to chance the name.  
To delete a file from external storage media  
0 Press the YES button to change the file name.  
This will cause the message Pls Waitto appear on  
the display to indicate that a card access operation is  
being performed. Never try to perform any other  
operation on the keyboard while the card is being  
accessed. The message Completewill appear on the  
d isplay after renaming is complete. After a few  
seconds, the message will be replaced by the file name  
selection screen.  
1 What you should do first depends on the type of  
external storage media you are using.  
SmartMedia Card  
On the WK-3500 press the DISK/ CARD button twice.  
On the WK-3000, press the CARD button once.  
This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/  
CARD or CARD on the display, and also displays  
Cardin the displays text area.  
If you do not want to continue with file renaming,  
press the EXIT button or the NO button in response  
to the above confirmation message. This will return  
you to the user area selection screen in step 5.  
Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)  
Press the DISK/ CARD button.  
This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/  
CARD on the display, and also displays Diskin  
the displays text area.  
A After you are finished performing the rename  
operation, press the DISK/CARD button (CARD  
button on the WK-3000) to exit the Card Mode.  
2 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to display the Card  
Mode (or Disk Mode) menu.  
3 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to display  
the Deletescreen.  
4 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to advance to the  
file type selection screen.  
5 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to select the  
type of the file you want to delete.  
6 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to display the file  
name selection screen.  
735A-E-103A  
E-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Data  
CURSOR  
WK-3500  
DISK/CARD  
WK-3000  
[+] []  
/
CARD  
YES/NO  
7 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons or [+] and  
[] buttons to select the name of the file you want  
to delete.  
Formatting External Storage Media  
Use the procedures in this section to format external storage  
media before using it for the first time, or when you want to  
delete all of the contents on a SmartMedia card or floppy  
diskette.  
8 After selecting the file, press the [̄] CURSOR  
button.  
This will display a confirmation message asking  
whether you really want to delete the file.  
IMPORTANT!  
Note that formatting a card to diskette that already  
contains data causes all of that data to be deleted. Data  
deleted by the format operation cannot be recovered.  
Before performing the procedure below, check to make  
sure that the media does not contain any data you might  
need.  
9 Press the YES button to delete the file.  
This will cause the message Pls Waitto appear on  
the display to indicate that a card access operation is  
being performed. Never try to perform any other  
operation on the keyboard while the card is being  
accessed. The message Completewill appear on the  
display after file deletion is complete. After a few  
seconds, the message will be replaced by the file name  
selection screen.  
PREPARATION  
SmartMedia Card  
Insert the SmartMedia card you want to format into  
the keyboards card slot. Make sure that the sticker is  
removed from the cards write area, which enables  
writing.  
If you do not want to continue with file deletion, press  
the EXIT button or the NO button in response to the  
above confirmation message. This will return you to  
the file name selection screen.  
Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)  
Insert the floppy diskette you want to format into the  
keyboards floppy disk drive. Make sure that the  
diskettes write protect hole is closed, which enables  
writing.  
0 After you are finished performing the delete  
operation, press the DISK/CARD button (CARD  
button on the WK-3000) to exit the Card Mode.  
E-102  
735A-E-104A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Data  
To format external storage media  
Inputting Characters  
The following describes the types of characters you can input  
when saving data to the user area and external storage media.  
1 What you should do first depends on the type of  
storage media you are using.  
SmartMedia Card  
On the WK-3500 press the DISK/ CARD button twice.  
On the WK-3000, press the CARD button once.  
This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/  
CARD or CARD on the display, and also displays  
Cardin the displays text area.  
User Area Data  
Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)  
Press the DISK/ CARD button.  
This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/  
CARD on the display, and also displays Diskin  
the displays text area.  
2 Press the [̄] CURSOR button to display the Card  
Mode (or Disk Mode) menu.  
3 Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to display  
the Formatscreen.  
4 Press the [̄] CURSOR button.  
WK-3500 Users  
If you are formatting a floppy diskette, a screen will  
appear here for specification of the floppy diskette  
density. Use the [̇] and [̈] CURSOR buttons to select  
either 2DDor 2H D, and then press the [̄]  
CURSOR button.  
External Storage Media Data  
You can input the same characters as those that are allowed  
for MS-DOS file names.  
This will display a confirmation message asking  
whether you really want to format the media.  
5 Press the YES button to start formatting.  
This will cause the message Pls Waitto appear on  
the display to indicate that a card access operation is  
being performed. Never try to perform any other  
operation on the keyboard while the card is being  
accessed. The message Completewill appear on the  
display after media formatting is complete. After a  
few seconds, the message will be replaced by the file  
name selection screen.  
If you do not want to continue with formatting, press  
the EXIT button or the NO button in response to the  
above confirmation message. This will return you to  
the mode menu.  
6 After you are finished performing the format  
operation, press the DISK/CARD button (CARD  
button on the WK-3000) to exit the Card Mode.  
735A-E-105A  
E-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Data  
SmartMedia Card Error Messages  
Display Message  
Cause  
Action  
Err Carf R/W  
Err CardFull  
There is something wrong with the card.  
The card is full.  
Use a different card.  
1. Use a different card.  
2. Delete files you no longer need from the  
card (page E-101).  
Err No Card  
Err Name  
1. The card is not set correctly in the card  
slot.  
2. There is no card in the card slot or the card  
was removed part way through a card  
operation.  
1. Remove the card and reinsert it correctly  
(page E-94).  
2. Insert a card into the card slot. Never remove  
a card from the card slot while a card access  
operation is in progress.  
1. A file with the same name as the one you  
are trying to use already exists.  
1. Use a different name (page E-100).  
2. You are trying to use a file name that is not  
allowed by MS-DOS.  
2. Name files using the allowable characters  
(page E-103).  
Err ReadOnly  
Err Format  
Attempt to save a file using the same name as  
an existing file that is read only.  
Save the new file to a different card or use  
another name.  
1. The format of the card is not compatible  
with this keyboard.  
2. The card is not formatted.  
3. The card is damaged.  
1. Change to a card that has the proper format.  
................................................................E-102  
2. Format the card. ...................................E-102  
3. Use a different card.  
Err Mem Full  
Keyboard m em ory becam e fu ll w hile  
importing data from card.  
1. Delete data you no longer need from the  
user area that corresponds to the file you  
are trying to store.  
2. If you have song data stored in Song  
Memory (SG0 to 4), delete the song data  
you no longer need. ............................... E-72  
Err Not SMF0  
Err No File  
Err Protect  
The file you are reading is not an SMF 0 format  
file.  
Use SMF 0 format files only.  
The keyboard cannot find any file it can read  
on the card.  
Use a card that contains data stored by this  
keyboard or compatible data from another device.  
The card is write protected.  
1. Use a different card.  
2. Remove the cards write protect sticker to  
enable data storage. ............................... E-93  
Err Convert  
There is not enough memory to save data  
produced by converting song data from SONG  
format to SMF format.  
Delete SMFs you no longer need from your  
SMF data (page E-80).  
Err WrongDat  
The data on the card is corrupted.  
Use other data or another card.  
E-104  
735A-E-106A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Data  
Disk Drive Error Messages (WK-3500 Only)  
Display Message  
Cause  
Action  
Err ReadOnly  
Attempt to save a file using the same name as  
an existing file that is read only.  
Save the new file to a different diskette or use  
another name.  
1. The format of the diskette is not compatible  
with this keyboard.  
2. The diskette is not formatted.  
3. The diskette is damaged.  
1. Change to a diskette that has the proper  
format..................................................... E-102  
2. Format the diskette. ............................. E-102  
3. Use a different diskette.  
Err Format  
Err Disk R/W  
Err DiskFull  
The diskette is damaged.  
The diskette is full.  
Use a different diskette.  
1. Use a different diskette.  
2. Delete any files you no longer need in order  
to make room for the data you want to  
save. ....................................................... E-101  
Err Mem Full  
Keyboard m em ory becam e fu ll w hile  
importing data from diskette.  
1. Delete data you no longer need from the  
user area that corresponds to the file you  
are trying to store.  
2. If you have song data stored in Song  
Memory (SG0 to 4), delete the song data  
you no longer need. ............................... E-72  
Err Not SMF0  
Err No Disk  
The file you are reading is not an SMF 0  
format file.  
Use SMF 0 format files only  
1. The diskette is not loaded in the drive  
correctly.  
2. No diskette is loaded in the drive.  
1. Eject the diskette from the drive and reload  
it. ............................................................... E-94  
2. Load a diskette into the drive.  
Err No File  
Err Protect  
The keyboard cannot find any file it can read  
on the diskette.  
Use a diskette that contains data stored by this  
keyboard or compatible data from another device.  
The diskette is write protected.  
1. Use a different diskette.  
2. Close the diskettes write protect hole to  
enable data storage. ............................... E-95  
Err Convert  
There is not enough memory to save data  
produced by converting song data from SONG  
format to SMF format.  
Delete SMFs you no longer need from your  
SMF data (page E-80).  
Err WrongDat  
Err Name  
The file you are reading is a wrong format file.  
The data on the diskette is corrupted.  
Use other data or another diskette.  
Use a different name (page E-100).  
A file with the same name as the one you are  
trying to use already exists on the floppy diskette.  
E-105  
735A-E-107A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Action  
See page  
No keyboard sound  
1. Power supply problem.  
1. Correctly attach the AC adaptor,  
make sure that batteries poles (+/  
) are facing correctly, and check  
to make sure that batteries are  
not dead.  
E-16, 17  
2. Power is not turned on.  
2. Press the POWER button to turn  
on power.  
3. Use the VOLUME knob to  
increase volume.  
4. N one of the accom p anim ent  
mode indicators are lit, which  
means Auto Accompaniment is  
turned off.  
E-22  
E-22  
E-38  
3. Volume setting is too low.  
4. Playing in the accompaniment  
keyboard area while the MODE  
button setting is CASIO CHORD  
or FINGERED.  
5. Local Control is off.  
6. Mixer channel 1 is turned off.  
5. Turn on Local Control.  
6. Use the Mixer to turn channel 1  
on.  
E-82  
E-47  
7. Mixer channel 1 volume setting  
is too low.  
8. The DSP volume parameter is set  
too low.  
9. The Expression value of the file  
data played back on the SMF  
player is too low.  
7. Use the Mixer to raise the volume  
setting for channel 1.  
8. Increase the DSP p aram eter  
value.  
9. Exit then re-enter the SMF Player  
Mode, or change the SMF Player  
play-along part.  
E-48  
E-50  
E-84  
Any of the following symptoms  
while using battery power.  
Dim power indicator  
Low battery power  
Replace the batteries with a set of  
new ones or use the AC adaptor.  
E-16, 17  
Instrument does not turn on.  
Display that is flickering,  
dim, or difficult to read  
Abnormally low speaker/  
headphone volume  
Distortion of sound output  
Occasional interruption of  
sound when playing at high  
volumes  
Sudden power failure when  
playing at high volumes  
Flickering or dimming of the  
display when playing at high  
volume  
Continu ed sou nd ou tp u t  
even after you release a key  
A tone that is totally different  
from the one that is selected.  
Abnormal rhythm pattern  
and demo tune play  
Loss of p ow er, sou nd  
distortion, or low volume  
w hen p laying from  
a
connected computer or MIDI  
device  
Sudden power failure while  
reading from or writing to a  
diskette (WK-3500 only)  
Auto Accompaniment does not  
sound.  
1. Accompaniment volume is set to  
000.  
2. Au to Accom p anim ent p art  
Channels 6 through 10 are turned  
off.  
1. Use the ACCOMP VOLUME  
button to increase the volume.  
2. Use the Mixer to turn the channels  
on.  
E-46  
E-47  
3. Au to Accom p anim ent p art  
Channels 6 through 10 volume  
setting is too low.  
3. Use the Mixer to raise the volume  
setting for the applicable channel.  
E-48  
E-106  
735A-E-108A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Action  
See page  
Sound output does not change  
when key pressure is varied.  
Touch response is turned off.  
Press  
the  
TRAN SPOSE/  
E-78  
E-74  
E-75  
FUNCTION button to turn it on.  
Playing the keyboard sounds  
two tones.  
Layer is turned on.  
Split is turned on.  
Press the LAYER button to turn off  
layering.  
Different tones sound when  
keys in d ifferent keyboard  
ranges are pressed.  
Press the SPLIT button to turn off  
split.  
The key or tuning does not  
match when playing along with  
another MIDI machine.  
1. The tu ning or transp ose  
parameter is set to a value other  
than 00.  
2. Mixer coarse tune, fine tune, and/  
or octave shift settings are values  
other than 00.  
1. Change the transpose or tuning  
parameter value to 00.  
E-77, 78  
E-49  
2. Use the Mixer to change the  
coarse tune, fine tune, and/ or  
octave shift settings to 00.  
Parts suddenly drop out during  
song memory playback.  
The number of tones being played  
at the sam e tim e exceed s the  
keyboards limitation.  
Use the Mixer to turn unneeded  
channels off and d ecrease the  
number of parts being played.  
E-47  
Some parts do not play at all  
during song memory playback.  
1. Channels are turned off.  
2. Volume setting is too low.  
1. Use the Mixer to turn channels  
on.  
2. Use the Mixer to check the  
volume setting.  
E-47  
E-48  
N othing happens w hen the  
LAYER or SPLIT bu tton is  
pressed.  
1. One or m ore of the m elod y  
channels (2 through 4) is turned  
off.  
1. Use the Mixer to tu rn on  
Channels 2 through 4.  
E-47  
2. The volume setting of one or  
more of the melody channels (2  
through 4) is too low.  
2. Use the Mixer to raise the volume  
setting of Channels 2 through 4.  
E-48  
3. The keyboard is in record  
standby.  
3. The LAYER and SPLIT buttons  
are disabled during recording  
and record standby.  
4. Turn off the SMF Player Mode.  
LAYER and SPLIT are not  
available while the SMF Player  
Mode is in use.  
E-74, 75  
E-84  
4. The SMF Player Mode is currently  
being use.  
No sound is produced when  
1. MIDI cables are not connected  
properly.  
2. Channel is turned off, or volume  
setting is too low.  
1. Connect MIDI cables properly.  
E-89  
p laying MIDI d ata from  
computer.  
a
2. Use the Mixer to turn the channel  
on, or raise the volume setting.  
E-46, 47  
Playing on the keyboard  
produces an unnatural sound  
when connected to a computer.  
The computers MIDI Thru function  
is turned on.  
Turn off the MIDI Thru function on  
the computer or turn off Local  
Control on the keyboard.  
E-82  
E-82  
Cannot  
record  
chord  
Accomp/ Song MIDI Out is turned  
off.  
Turn on Accomp/ Song MIDI Out.  
accom p anim ent d ata on  
computer.  
a
735A-E-109A  
E-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Action  
See page  
The keyboard starts u p  
abnormally when it is turned  
on.  
E-83  
Flash memory is corrupted. There  
is something wrong with the card.  
1. Remove the batteries from the  
keyboard and disconnect the AC  
adaptor and press the POWER  
button.  
2. Reload the batteries and / or  
reconnect the AC adaptor, and  
then press the POWER button  
again to turn on power.  
3. Use  
the  
TRAN SPOSE/  
FUNCTION button to perform  
the system reset operation.  
If this d oes not solve the  
problem, contact your nearest  
au thorized CASIO Service  
Provider to request repair.  
The keyboard does not turn off  
when the POWER button is  
pressed.  
E-22  
E-83  
The keyboard is writing data to its  
Flash memory, a SmartMedia card,  
or a floppy diskette (WK-3500 only).  
Wait until the ongoing operation is  
com p lete and then p ress the  
POWER button again to turn off the  
keyboard.  
A
d ow nload ed tone w ith  
Someone may have turned off the  
keyboard while data was being  
stored in Flash m em ory or  
something else has caused Flash  
m em ory contents to becom e  
corrupted for some reason.  
Use the TRANSPOSE/ FUNCTION  
button to perform the system reset  
operation. If this does not correct  
the problem, contact your nearest  
authorized CASIO Service Provider  
to request maintenance.  
waveform contains noise or  
keyboard operations become  
abnormal when user data is  
selected.  
Cannot save data to a card.  
E-93  
E-94  
E-101  
1. The card is write-protected.  
1. Remove the write-protect sticker  
from the card.  
2. Correctly insert the card into the  
card slot.  
3. Use a different card or delete files  
you no longer need from the card  
you are using.  
2. The card is not inserted correctly  
into the card slot.  
3. There is not enough space left on  
the card.  
E-93  
4. You are trying to use a card whose  
voltage or cap acity is not  
supported by this keyboard.  
5. The card is damaged.  
4. Use only a card of the voltage  
and capacity specified for this  
keyboard.  
5. Use a different card.  
Cannot recall data from a card.  
E-94  
E-83  
1. The card is not inserted correctly  
into the card slot.  
2. There is not enou gh sp ace  
available in the area into which  
you are trying to import the data.  
1. Correctly insert the card into the  
card slot.  
2. Delete rhythm, SMF, or tone with  
w ave d ata cu rrently in the  
keyboard s Flash m em ory to  
make room from the imported  
data.  
3. Use only a card of the voltage  
and capacity specified for this  
keyboard.  
3. You are trying to use a card whose  
voltage or cap acity is not  
supported by this keyboard.  
4. The card is damaged.  
E-93  
4. Use a different card.  
E-108  
735A-E-110A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Model:  
WK-3500/ 3000  
Keyboard:  
Tones:  
76 standard-size keys, 6 1/ 4 octaves with touch response (OFF/ 1/ 2/ 3)  
300 Advanced Tones + 200 Preset Tones + 16 Drum Sets + 100 standard user  
tones + 20 user tones with waves*: + 4 drum sets with waves* + 50 drawbar  
organ tones + 100 user drawbar organ tones + 150 Drawbar Organ Tones (790  
tones total); layer/ split  
Rhythm Instrument Tones:  
Polyphony:  
61  
32 notes maximum (10 for certain tones)  
Drawbar Organ Function  
Drawbars:  
9 (16, 5 1/ 3, 8, 4, 2 2/ 3, 2, 1 3/ 5, 1 1/ 3, 1)  
Percussion:  
Second, Third  
On, Off  
Click:  
Effects:  
DSP (200 types: internal, 100 user areas) + Reverb (16 types) + Chorus (16 types)  
+ Equalize (10 types, 4 bands)  
Auto Accompaniment  
Rhythm Patterns:  
Tempo:  
156 (internal, 16 user areas*)  
Variable (226 steps, = 30 to 255)  
Chords:  
3 fingering methods (CASIO CHORD, FINGERED, FULL RANGE CHORD)  
Rhythm Controller:  
START/ STOP, INTRO/ ENDING 1 and 2, VARIATION/ FILL-IN 1 and 2,  
SYNCHRO/ FILL-IN NEXT  
Accomp Volume:  
One-touch Presets:  
0 to 127 (128 steps)  
Recalls settings for tone, tempo, layer on/ off, and harmonize on/ off in  
accordance with rhythm.  
Auto Harmonize:  
10 types : Automatic addition of notes that harmonize with melody note in  
accordance with specified Auto Accompaniment chords.  
Memory Function  
Songs:  
5
Recording Tracks:  
Recording Methods:  
Memory Capacity:  
Edit Function:  
6 (2 through 6 are melody tracks)  
Real-time, step  
Approximately 10,000 notes (total for 5 songs)  
Equipped  
Demo Tunes:  
3
<WK-3500>  
Tune Number  
Name  
Composer  
Steave Turner  
Play Time  
2:15  
0
1
2
Garage Flava  
Breath of Air  
Nora Park  
Hage Software  
2:19  
TECH-NOTE INTERNATIONAL LTD.  
2:06  
<WK-3000>  
Tune Number  
Name  
Composer  
TECH-NOTE INTERNATIONAL LTD.  
Steave Turner  
Play Time  
2:06  
0
1
2
Nora Park  
Garage Flava  
Strut With Beauty  
2:15  
Edward Alstrom  
1:52  
735A-E-111A  
E-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Synthesizer Function  
Parameters:  
Attack time; release time; resonance; cutoff frequency; vibrato type; vibrato  
delay; vibrato depth; vibrato rate; octave shift; level; touch sense; reverb send;  
chorus send; DSP line; DSP type; DSP parameter; 300 Advanced Tones + 200  
Preset Tones + 16 Drum Sounds + 124 User Tones + 150 Drawbar Organ Tones  
(790 tones total)  
Registration Memory  
Number of Setups:  
Memory Contents:  
32 (4 setups x 8 banks)  
Tone, Rhythm, Tempo, Layer on/ off, Split on/ off, Split point, Harmonize on/  
off, Mixer settings (Channels 1 to 10), Effect settings, Touch Response settings,  
Assignable jack setting, Transpose, Tuning, Accompaniment volume setting,  
Pitch bend range, Auto Harmonize type, MODE button setting, Synchro  
standby state, Mixer Hold, DSP Hold, Synthesizer Mode parameters  
Mixer Function  
Channels:  
16  
Parameters:  
Tone; part on/ off; volume; pan pot; octave shift; coarse tune; fine tune; reverb  
send; chorus send; DSP line; DSP level, DSP pan, DPS system reverb send, DPS  
system chorus send  
MIDI:  
16 multi-timbre receive, GM Level 1 standard  
Other Functions  
Pitch Bend Range:  
Modulation:  
Transpose:  
Adjustable (12 semitones upwards and downwards)  
Equipped  
49 steps (24 semitones to +24 semitones)  
Variable (A4 = approximately 440Hz ±100 cents)  
Adjustable contrast  
Tuning:  
LCD:  
SMF Player:  
Flash memory storage for up to 200 files*  
Supported Format:  
SMF0  
Flash Memory  
Capacity:  
2MB  
Shared Area:  
Approximately 1.5MB (waveform data, accompaniment data, SMF data)  
Further storage of waveform, accompaniment, and SMF data becomes  
impossible after the total of such data reaches approximately 1.5MB.  
Card Slot  
3.3V SmartMediaTM (8MB, 16KB, 32MB, 64MB, 128MB)  
Functions:  
Save and load of user tones, user songs, and registration data; playback of SMF;  
card formatting; file delete; file rename  
Floppy Disk Drive (WK-3500 only)  
Type:  
3.5" FDD  
Formats:  
2DD (720KB MS-DOS format)  
2HD (1.44MB MS-DOS format)  
Functions:  
Save and load of user tones, user songs, and registration data; playback of SMF;  
disk formatting; file delete; file rename  
E-110  
735A-E-112A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Terminals  
MIDI Terminals:  
IN, OUT  
Sustain/ Assignable Terminal:  
Standard jack (sustain, sostenuto, soft, rhythm start/ stop)  
WK-3500  
Headphones:  
Stereo standard jack  
Output Impedance : 200Ω  
Output Voltage : 250mV (RMS) MAX  
Standard jack x 2  
Line Out (R, L/ MONO):  
Output Impedance : 3kΩ  
Output Voltage : 1.5V (RMS) MAX  
WK-3000  
Headphone/ Output Terminal:  
Stereo standard jack  
Output Impedance: 200Ω  
Output Voltage: 5.5V (RMS) MAX  
12V DC  
Power Supply Terminal:  
Power Supply:  
Batteries:  
Dual power supply system  
6 D-size batteries  
Battery Life:  
AC Adaptor:  
Auto Power Off:  
Approximately 4 hours continuous operation on alkaline batteries  
AD-12  
Turns power off approximately six minutes after last key operation. Enabled  
under battery power only, can be disabled manually.  
Speaker Output:  
Power consumption:  
Dimensions:  
6.1W + 6.1W  
12V  
18W  
122.3 x 42.3 x 16.0 cm (48 3/ 16 x 16 11  
/
16 x 6 5/ 16 inch)  
Weight:  
WK-3500: Approximately 10.0 kg (22.0 lbs) (without batteries)  
WK-3000: Approximately 9.5 kg (20.9 lbs) (without batteries)  
* The same memory area is used to store waveform data, accompaniment data, and SMF data.  
735A-E-113A  
E-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Care of your Instrument  
Avoid heat, humidity or direct sunlight.  
Do not overexpose the instrument to direct sunlight, or place it near an air conditioner, or in any extremely hot place.  
Do not use near a TV or radio.  
This instrument can cause video or audio interference with TV and radio reception. If this happens, move the instrument away  
from the TV or radio.  
Do not use lacquer, thinner or similar chemicals for cleaning.  
Clean the instrument with a soft cloth dampened in a weak solution of water and a neutral detergent. Soak the cloth in the  
solution and squeeze until it is almost dry.  
Avoid use in areas subjected to temperature extremes.  
Extremely high or low temperature can cause figures on the LCD screen to become dim and difficult to read. This condition  
should correct itself when the instrument is brought back to normal temperature.  
NOTE  
You may notice lines in the finish of the case of this instrument. These lines are a result of the molding process used to shape  
the plastic of the case. They are not cracks or breaks in the plastic, and are no cause for concern.  
E-112  
735A-E-114A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Tone List  
Advanced Tones  
Program Bank Select Maximum  
Range  
Type  
No.  
Tone Group  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
Tone Name  
DSP Type  
Change  
MSB  
Polyphony  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
STEREO GRAND PIANO  
STEREO MELLOW PIANO  
STEREO BRIGHT PIANO  
GRAND PIANO  
MELLOW PIANO  
BRIGHT PIANO  
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
6
2
0
1
1
0
1
2
3
3
3
6
4
5
4
4
4
5
7
5
4
4
4
4
4
5
51  
52  
50  
48  
50  
48  
49  
51  
48  
54  
51  
52  
53  
53  
50  
48  
51  
50  
49  
48  
48  
55  
51  
52  
52  
48  
50  
56  
57  
50  
53  
54  
49  
53  
50  
49  
48  
48  
48  
48  
50  
50  
49  
49  
52  
52  
49  
49  
53  
48  
53  
54  
48  
16  
16  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
32  
32  
16  
16  
32  
16  
32  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
32  
32  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1
RvbHall1  
GateRvb2  
Equalize  
RvbHall1  
Equalize  
Enhancer  
Reflect  
CmpChoRf  
Equalize  
Cho Flan  
Equalize  
RvbHall1  
Reflect  
Enha Dly  
ChoDly 1  
Chorus 4  
Equalize  
RvbRoom2  
CmpChoRf  
Chorus 3  
Chorus 3  
Cho Trem  
Auto Pan  
CmpChoRf  
Equalize  
CmpChoRf  
Equalize  
Auto Wah  
PhaAPan1  
Equalize  
StPhaser  
Equalize  
Enha Dly  
ChoDly 1  
Auto Wah  
CmpEnDly  
Cho Trem  
Reflect  
GRAND PIANO WIDE  
HARPSICHORD  
8
9
ELEC. GRAND PIANO  
SYNTH-STR PIANO  
MODERN PIANO  
STRINGS PIANO  
VOICE PIANO  
DANCE PIANO  
MODERN E.G.PIANO  
HONKY-TONK 1  
1 OCTAVE PIANO  
2 OCTAVE PIANO  
COUPLED HARPSICHORD  
ELEC. PIANO 1  
MODERN EP 1  
TREMOLO E.PIANO  
60S E.PIANO  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
E.PIANO  
CHROM.PERC  
CHROM.PERC  
CHROM.PERC  
CHROM.PERC  
CHROM.PERC  
CHROM.PERC  
CHROM.PERC  
CHROM.PERC  
ORGAN  
MELLOW E.PIANO  
SYNTH-STR. E.PIANO 2  
CLAVI  
SOFT E.PIANO  
AUTO WAH E.PIANO  
PHASER E.PIANO  
GLASS E.PIANO  
E.PIANO PAD  
SYNTH-STR. E.PIANO 1  
MODERN EP 2  
STRINGS E.PIANO  
RESONANCE CLAVI  
PULSE CLAVI  
TREMOLO VIBRAPHONE  
MARIMBA  
GLOCKENSPIEL  
CELESTA  
VIBRAPHONE  
PHASER MARIMBA  
DELAY GLOCKENSPIEL  
DELAY CELESTA  
ROTARY DRAWBAR  
ROTARY PERC. ORGAN 1  
70S ORGAN  
TREMOLO ORGAN  
JAZZ DRAWBAR  
ROCK ORGAN  
5
7
7
11  
12  
9
Reflect  
Reflect  
Reflect  
8
N
N
N
1
11  
12  
9
PhaDly 2  
PhaDly 2  
3Tap Dly  
RotRef 1  
RotRef 2  
Rotary 1  
Cho Trem  
RotRef 1  
Rotary 2  
Rotary 2  
RotRef 1  
RvbHall2  
8
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
16  
17  
17  
16  
17  
18  
16  
17  
19  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ROTARY ELEC. ORGAN  
ROTARY PERC. ORGAN 2  
CHURCH ORGAN 1  
735A-E115A  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Program Bank Select Maximum  
Range  
Type  
No.  
Tone Group  
Tone Name  
CHAPEL ORGAN  
DSP Type  
Change  
MSB  
Polyphony  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
ORGAN  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
BASS  
19  
21  
22  
23  
16  
16  
16  
16  
17  
17  
17  
18  
19  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
27  
29  
30  
27  
28  
24  
25  
25  
25  
24  
105  
26  
29  
29  
29  
30  
30  
27  
27  
27  
28  
30  
30  
30  
32  
33  
34  
35  
37  
38  
38  
39  
39  
38  
39  
38  
39  
32  
51  
48  
48  
48  
48  
51  
50  
54  
48  
51  
50  
49  
49  
49  
49  
49  
48  
48  
48  
49  
52  
49  
52  
53  
49  
51  
51  
49  
50  
49  
48  
50  
48  
51  
50  
51  
50  
48  
51  
50  
48  
48  
49  
53  
48  
48  
48  
48  
48  
48  
52  
48  
50  
53  
51  
49  
52  
49  
32  
16  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
32  
32  
16  
32  
16  
16  
32  
32  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
16  
32  
16  
N
N
RvbHall2  
Reflect  
ACCORDION  
HARMONICA  
BANDONEON  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
N
Reflect  
Reflect  
Reflect  
Reflect  
Rotary 1  
Od Rot 2  
Reflect  
Rotary 2  
Reflect  
DRAWBAR ORGAN 1  
ELEC. ORGAN  
DRAWBAR ORGAN 2  
OVD ROTARY ORGAN  
PERC. ORGAN 1  
PERC. ORGAN 2  
JAZZ ORGAN  
OVD ROCK ORGAN  
CHURCH ORGAN 2  
OCTAVE ACCORDION  
SLOW HARMONICA  
NEO BANDONEON  
NYLON GUITAR  
OdRtRef1  
RvbHall1  
CmpChoRf  
RvbRoom2  
ChoDly 4  
Equalize  
Equalize  
CmpChoRf  
CmpChoRf  
CrnDelay  
CmpOdDly  
DistDly1  
Rotary 2  
MetalDly  
ChoDly 3  
Enha Dly  
Equalize  
ChoDly 4  
CmpChoRf  
Equalize  
RvbRoom3  
CmpDelay  
AWhOdDly  
Ovrdrive  
DistDly2  
DistDly2  
Equalize  
Equalize  
Equalize  
Equalize  
CmpDelay  
CmpCrDly  
CmpCrDly  
Reflect  
STEEL GUITAR  
JAZZ GUITAR  
CHORUS CLEAN GUITAR  
CRUNCH ELEC. GUITAR  
OVD FRONT GUITAR  
FEEDBACK DIST. GT  
ROTARY GUITAR  
MUTED DIST. GUITAR  
MELLOW NYLON GUITAR  
ENHANCED STEEL GUITAR  
12 STRING GUITAR  
CHORUS STEEL GUITAR  
UKULELE  
BANJO  
N
OCT JAZZ GUITAR  
OVERDRIVE GUITAR  
AUTO WAH OVERDRIVE GT  
OVD REAR GUITAR  
MORE DISTORTION GT  
DISTORTION FRONT GT  
CLEAN GUITAR  
ELEC. GUITAR FRONT  
ELEC. GUITAR REAR  
MUTED GUITAR  
DISTORTION GUITAR  
FEEDBACK GUITAR  
DISTORTION CLEAN GT  
ACOUSTIC BASS  
FINGERED BASS  
PICKED BASS  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
Limiter  
Comp 2  
ChoDly 1  
Comp 2  
Chorus 1  
PhaCho 1  
Od Rot 1  
Enha Cho  
AWhChDly  
DistDly1  
PhaDly 2  
Comp 2  
FRETLESS BASS  
SLAP BASS  
SAW SYNTH-BASS 1  
ANALOG SYNTH-BASS  
SQR SYNTH-BASS 1  
RESO. SQR BASS 1  
RESO. SAW BASS 1  
DISTORTION SQR BASS  
RESO. SAW BASS 2  
DIGITAL BASS 1  
BASS  
RIDE BASS  
RvbRoom1  
A-2  
735A-E116A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Program Bank Select Maximum  
Range  
Type  
No.  
Tone Group  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
Tone Name  
DSP Type  
Change  
MSB  
Polyphony  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
168  
CHORUS FINGERED BASS  
COMP. PICKED BASS  
FLAN. FRETLESS BASS  
MORE SLAP BASS  
ACID BASS  
SAW SYNTH-BASS 2  
TRI SYNTH-BASS 1  
SINE BASS  
33  
34  
35  
37  
38  
38  
39  
39  
38  
39  
40  
42  
41  
45  
46  
40  
42  
45  
46  
48  
48  
49  
49  
50  
50  
52  
53  
54  
54  
55  
55  
51  
52  
53  
48  
48  
49  
49  
50  
51  
53  
54  
54  
48  
49  
54  
54  
55  
55  
55  
55  
55  
56  
57  
59  
60  
61  
61  
49  
49  
49  
49  
50  
54  
53  
54  
55  
55  
48  
48  
48  
49  
48  
49  
49  
48  
49  
51  
48  
48  
49  
50  
48  
50  
49  
48  
49  
52  
53  
48  
51  
48  
49  
52  
50  
51  
51  
49  
50  
52  
53  
53  
52  
51  
54  
49  
54  
55  
48  
56  
51  
50  
48  
50  
50  
51  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
16  
32  
32  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
32  
32  
16  
16  
32  
16  
32  
32  
16  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
16  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
1  
N
1  
N
N
N
N
1  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Crn Cho  
CmpEnDly  
Cho Flan  
Comp 2  
Enhancer  
Equalize  
Equalize  
Limiter  
BASS  
BASS  
BASS  
ORGAN BASS 1  
DIGITAL BASS 2  
VIOLIN  
Comp 1  
Chorus 2  
GateRvb2  
GateRvb2  
GateRvb2  
RvbHall1  
Reflect  
RvbHall2  
RvbHall2  
Reflect  
ORCHESTRA  
ORCHESTRA  
ORCHESTRA  
ORCHESTRA  
ORCHESTRA  
ORCHESTRA  
ORCHESTRA  
ORCHESTRA  
ORCHESTRA  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
ENSEMBLE  
BRASS  
CELLO  
VIOLA  
PIZZICATO ENSEMBLE  
HARP  
SLOW VIOLIN  
SLOW CELLO  
PIZZICATO  
HARPS  
Reflect  
STEREO STRINGS  
STRING ENSEMBLE  
SLOW STRINGS  
CHAMBER  
PURE SYNTH-STRINGS 1  
SYNTH-STRINGS 1  
STEREO CHOIR  
VOICE UUH  
SYNTH-VOICE 1  
SYNTH-VOICE 2  
POP HIT 1  
POP HIT 2  
RESO SYNTH-STRINGS  
SYNTH-CHOIR  
RvbHall1  
RvbRoom3  
ChoDly 3  
Reflect  
ChoDly 3  
ChoDly 3  
RvbHall1  
RvbRoom1  
Chorus 4  
ChoDly 3  
Equalize  
FlanDly1  
ChoDly 3  
StXDelay  
RvbRoom1  
RvbHall1  
RvbHall1  
RvbHall1  
RvbRoom3  
DistDly1  
PhaAPan2  
DistDly1  
DistDly1  
FlanDly3  
RvbHall1  
RvbHall1  
DistDly1  
FlanDly2  
DistDly1  
GateRvb2  
Rotary 2  
RvbHall1  
MetalDly  
GateRvb2  
GateRvb2  
Enhancer  
RvbHall1  
Enha Dly  
Enha Dly  
VOICE DOO  
BRIGHT STRINGS  
WIDE STRINGS  
MELLOW STRINGS  
ORCHESTRA STRINGS 1  
PURE SYNTH-STRINGS 2  
PHASER SYNTH-STRINGS  
SYNTH-DOO  
SYNTH-VOICE 3  
VOICE PAD  
CHOIR STRINGS  
ORCHESTRA STRINGS 2  
BLOW VOICE  
NOISY SYNTH-VOICE  
BASS HIT  
PIANO HIT  
ORGAN HIT  
ORCHESTRA HIT 1  
TECHNO HIT  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1  
N
1  
N
VELO. TRUMPET  
VELO. TROMBONE  
MUTE TRUMPET  
OCTAVE FRENCH HORN  
STEREO BRASS  
BRASS + SYNTH  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
N
735A-E117A  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Program Bank Select Maximum  
Range  
Type  
No.  
Tone Group  
Tone Name  
DSP Type  
Change  
MSB  
Polyphony  
169  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
181  
182  
183  
184  
185  
186  
187  
188  
189  
190  
191  
192  
193  
194  
195  
196  
197  
198  
199  
200  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
225  
226  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
BRASS  
REED  
REED  
REED  
REED  
REED  
REED  
REED  
REED  
REED  
REED  
REED  
REED  
REED  
REED  
REED  
REED  
REED  
PIPE  
PIPE  
PIPE  
PIPE  
PIPE  
PIPE  
PIPE  
PIPE  
PIPE  
PIPE  
PIPE  
PIPE  
PIPE  
PIPE  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
DEEP SYNTH-BRASS 1  
SOFT SYNTH-BRASS  
VINTAGE SYNTH-BRASS  
TRUMPET 1  
TRUMPET P  
TROMBONE  
62  
63  
63  
56  
56  
57  
57  
59  
60  
61  
62  
58  
62  
63  
62  
61  
63  
57  
61  
61  
62  
61  
58  
66  
65  
64  
66  
65  
71  
68  
64  
65  
66  
65  
67  
71  
65  
66  
67  
68  
73  
72  
75  
76  
74  
78  
73  
72  
73  
73  
73  
75  
74  
78  
81  
81  
81  
80  
51  
51  
48  
48  
50  
48  
49  
49  
48  
53  
53  
48  
52  
52  
48  
52  
49  
51  
48  
54  
54  
55  
49  
49  
49  
49  
50  
51  
49  
48  
48  
48  
48  
50  
48  
48  
52  
51  
49  
49  
49  
48  
48  
48  
48  
49  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
49  
49  
48  
48  
53  
54  
48  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
32  
32  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
N
N
N
N
N
1  
1  
N
1  
N
N
1  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Enha Dly  
Enha Dly  
RvbHall2  
RvbHall1  
RvbHall1  
RvbHall1  
RvbHall1  
LFO Wah  
RvbHall1  
Comp 2  
Enha Dly  
RvbHall1  
Delay  
Delay  
Comp 2  
RvbHall2  
ChoDly 4  
GateRvb2  
RvbHall2  
RvbHall2  
Equalize  
RvbHall2  
Comp 2  
Enhancer  
Enhancer  
CmpEnDly  
GateRvb2  
GateRvb2  
Reflect  
GateRvb2  
Equalize  
Equalize  
Equalize  
Equalize  
Equalize  
GateRvb2  
Equalize  
Equalize  
Comp 2  
ChoDly 4  
GateRvb2  
Equalize  
GateRvb2  
Equalize  
GateRvb2  
ChoDly 4  
Reflect  
TROMBONE F  
WAH MUTE TRUMPET  
FRENCH HORN  
BRASS SFZ  
DEEP SYNTH-BRASS 2  
TUBA  
SQR SYNTH-BRASS  
WARM SYNTH-BRASS  
ANALOG BRASS 1  
BRASS + TRUMPET  
SLOW SYNTH-BRASS  
TROMBONE SECTION  
BRASS  
OCTAVE BRASS  
ANALOG BRASS 2  
BRASS + FRENCH HORN  
STACK TUBA  
BREATHY TENOR SAX  
BREATHY ALTO SAX  
MELLOW SOPRANO SAX  
VELO. TENOR SAX  
VELO. ALTO SAX  
VELO. CLARINET  
OBOE  
SOPRANO SAX  
ALTO SAX  
TENOR SAX  
N
1  
1  
1  
N
1  
1  
N
N
N
1  
1  
1  
1  
N
1  
1  
1  
N
N
1
N
N
N
N
N
1
N
N
N
N
ALTO SAX FF  
BARITONE SAX  
CLARINET  
ALTO SAXYS  
TENOR SAXYS  
STACK BARITONE SAX  
SYNTH-OBOE  
VELO. FLUTE  
PICCOLO  
PAN FLUTE  
BOTTLE BLOW  
RECORDER  
WHISTLES  
FLUTE  
PICCOLO ENSEMBLE  
MELLOW FLUTE  
OCTAVE FLUTE  
FLUTE + REED  
SYNTH-PAN FLUTE  
SYNTH-RECORDER  
WHISTLE  
SAW TOOTH LEAD  
MELLOW SAW LEAD  
GR LEAD 1  
Equalize  
Reflect  
Equalize  
StXDelay  
AWhChDly  
ChoDly 4  
Od Rot 2  
Enha Dly  
Enha Dly  
PhaDly 2  
ChoDly 2  
N
N
N
N
N
N
SQUARE LEAD 1  
A-4  
735A-E118A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Program Bank Select Maximum  
Range  
Type  
No.  
Tone Group  
Tone Name  
SQUARE LEAD 2  
VOX SQR LEAD  
CALLIOPE LEAD  
CHIFF LEAD 1  
CHARANG LEAD  
GT SYNTH-LEAD 1  
SOLO VOX  
DSP Type  
Change  
MSB  
Polyphony  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
232  
233  
234  
235  
236  
237  
238  
239  
240  
241  
242  
243  
244  
245  
246  
247  
248  
249  
250  
251  
252  
253  
254  
255  
256  
257  
258  
259  
260  
261  
262  
263  
264  
265  
266  
267  
268  
269  
270  
271  
272  
273  
274  
275  
276  
277  
278  
279  
280  
281  
282  
283  
284  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-LEAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
80  
80  
82  
83  
84  
84  
85  
86  
86  
87  
87  
81  
80  
80  
82  
81  
81  
82  
80  
83  
84  
85  
86  
86  
87  
81  
81  
81  
80  
80  
80  
83  
84  
86  
86  
87  
86  
86  
88  
89  
90  
90  
89  
91  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
101  
103  
88  
51  
52  
48  
48  
48  
49  
48  
48  
49  
48  
50  
57  
53  
54  
49  
55  
56  
50  
55  
49  
50  
50  
50  
51  
51  
58  
59  
51  
56  
49  
57  
50  
51  
52  
53  
52  
54  
55  
48  
48  
48  
49  
49  
48  
50  
48  
48  
48  
48  
48  
49  
48  
50  
48  
49  
48  
48  
49  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
32  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ChoDly 2  
ChoDly 4  
Equalize  
Comp 1  
Equalize  
PhaAPan1  
PhaDly 1  
Auto Wah  
PhaDly 1  
Chorus 2  
LFO Wah  
RgChoDly  
FlanDly1  
Tremolo  
RvbPlate  
Equalize  
Enha Cho  
Reflect  
FIFTH LEAD  
HUSKY SAW  
BASS LEAD 1  
BASS LEAD 2  
VOX SAW LEAD  
SQUARE LEAD 3  
MELLOW SQR LEAD  
ADVANCED CALLIOPE  
SEQ SAW 1  
REED SAW  
PIPE LEAD  
ATTACK SQR 1  
PERC. CHIFF 1  
PLUCK LEAD 1  
VOX LEAD 1  
5TH MELLOW  
4TH LEAD  
REED LEAD  
RESO. SAW LEAD  
GR LEAD 2  
DETUNED SAW  
ATTACK SQR 2  
SQUARE WAVE 1  
SQUARE WAVE 2  
CHIFF LEAD 2  
PLUCK LEAD 2  
TECH POLYSYNTH 1  
RESO LEAD  
FRET LEAD  
TECH POLYSYNTH 2  
7TH SEQ  
FANTASY PAD  
WARM PAD  
POLYSYNTH PAD  
NOISY SAW  
Comp 2  
Comp 1  
FlanDly2  
FlanDly2  
StXDelay  
Auto Pan  
Equalize  
Phaser  
CmpCrDly  
Chorus 2  
3Tap Dly  
Auto Pan  
AWhChDly  
Comp 1  
FlanDly2  
Ring Mod  
Enha Dly  
Enha Dly  
LoFi Ref  
Phaser  
PhaDly 2  
Equalize  
Cho Trem  
Lo-Fi  
SINE PAD  
Phaser  
SPACE VOICE 1  
COSMIC VOICE  
BOWED PAD  
METAL PAD 1  
HALO PAD  
SWEEP PAD  
RAIN PAD  
VIBE PAD  
MOVIE SOUND  
CRYSTAL PAD 2  
ATMOSPHERE PAD  
BRIGHTER  
GOBLIN PAD  
STAR THEME  
NEW FANTASY  
RotRef 1  
Rotary 2  
3Tap Dly  
St Delay  
StPhaser  
Equalize  
Comp 1  
CmpDelay  
FlanDly1  
St Delay  
GateRvb1  
Delay  
Flanger  
PhaAPan2  
ChoDly 3  
735A-E119A  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Program Bank Select Maximum  
Range  
Type  
No.  
Tone Group  
Tone Name  
WARM VOX  
DSP Type  
Change  
MSB  
Polyphony  
285  
286  
287  
288  
289  
290  
291  
292  
293  
294  
295  
296  
297  
298  
299  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
SYNTH-PAD  
89  
89  
90  
91  
91  
91  
92  
92  
93  
100  
98  
90  
94  
95  
99  
50  
51  
50  
51  
52  
49  
50  
49  
49  
48  
48  
51  
49  
49  
49  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Equalize  
Equalize  
Equalize  
Cho Flan  
DsChoDly  
RgChoDly  
Equalize  
LFO Wah  
RotRef 1  
ChoDly 2  
PhaDly 2  
ChoDly 3  
Dist Cho  
RgChoDly  
ChoDly 3  
FLUTE PAD  
ATTACK POLYSYNTH  
CHIFF CHOIR  
STAR VOICE  
SPACE VOICE 2  
GLASS PAD  
BOTTLE PAD  
METAL VOICE  
BRIGHTNESS PAD  
CRYSTAL PAD 1  
POLY SAW  
BOUNCE PAD  
SLOW SWEEP  
STEEL PAD  
Preset Tones  
Program Bank Select Maximum  
Range  
Type  
No.  
Tone Group  
GM  
Tone Name  
DSP Type  
Change  
MSB  
Polyphony  
300  
301  
302  
303  
304  
305  
306  
307  
308  
309  
310  
311  
312  
313  
314  
315  
316  
317  
318  
319  
320  
321  
322  
323  
324  
325  
326  
327  
328  
329  
330  
331  
332  
333  
334  
335  
PIANO 1  
0
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
32  
32  
32  
16  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
32  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
PIANO 2  
PIANO 3  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HONKY-TONK GM  
ELEC. PIANO 1 GM  
MODERN EP 1 GM  
HARPSICHORD GM  
CLAVI GM  
CELESTA GM  
GLOCKENSPIEL GM  
MUSIC BOX  
VIBRAPHONE GM  
MARIMBA GM  
XYLOPHONE  
TUBULAR BELL  
DULCIMER  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
DRAWBAR ORGAN 1 GM  
PERC. ORGAN 1 GM  
ROCK ORGAN GM  
CHURCH ORGAN 1 GM  
REED ORGAN  
ACCORDION GM  
HARMONICA GM  
BANDONEON GM  
NYLON GUITAR GM  
STEEL GUITAR GM  
JAZZ GUITAR GM  
CLEAN GUITAR GM  
MUTED GUITAR GM  
OVERDRIVE GT GM  
DISTORTION GT GM  
GUITAR HARMONICS  
ACOUSTIC BASS GM  
FINGERED BASS GM  
PICKED BASS GM  
FRETLESS BASS GM  
A-6  
735A-E120A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Program Bank Select Maximum  
Range  
Type  
No.  
Tone Group  
GM  
Tone Name  
SLAP BASS 1  
DSP Type  
Change  
MSB  
Polyphony  
336  
337  
338  
339  
340  
341  
342  
343  
344  
345  
346  
347  
348  
349  
350  
351  
352  
353  
354  
355  
356  
357  
358  
359  
360  
361  
362  
363  
364  
365  
366  
367  
368  
369  
370  
371  
372  
373  
374  
375  
376  
377  
378  
379  
380  
381  
382  
383  
384  
385  
386  
387  
388  
389  
390  
391  
392  
393  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
32  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
32  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
32  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
SLAP BASS 2 GM  
SAW SYNTH-BASS 1 GM  
SQR SYNTH-BASS 1 GM  
VIOLIN GM  
VIOLA GM  
CELLO GM  
CONTRABASS  
TREMOLO STRINGS  
PIZZICATO GM  
HARP GM  
TIMPANI  
STRINGS 1  
STRINGS 2  
SYNTH-STRINGS 1 GM  
RESO SYNTH-STRINGS GM  
CHOIR  
VOICE DOO GM  
SYNTH-VOICE 1 GM  
ORCHESTRA HIT 1 GM  
TRUMPET 1 GM  
TROMBONE GM  
TUBA GM  
MUTE TRUMPET GM  
FRENCH HORN GM  
BRASS GM  
SYNTH-BRASS 1  
SYNTH-BRASS 2  
SOPRANO SAX GM  
ALTO SAX GM  
TENOR SAX GM  
BARITONE SAX GM  
OBOE GM  
ENGLISH HORN  
BASSOON  
CLARINET GM  
PICCOLO GM  
FLUTE GM  
RECORDER GM  
PAN FLUTE GM  
BOTTLE BLOW GM  
SHAKUHACHI  
WHISTLE GM  
OCARINA  
SQUARE LEAD  
PLAIN SAW LEAD  
CALLIOPE  
CHIFF  
CHARANG  
PLAIN SOLO VOX  
FIFTH SAW  
BASS LEAD  
FANTASY  
WARM SYNTH  
POLYSYNTH  
SPACE VOX  
BOWED GLASS  
METAL SYNTH  
735A-E121A  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Program Bank Select Maximum  
Range  
Type  
No.  
Tone Group  
Tone Name  
HALO SYNTH  
DSP Type  
Change  
MSB  
Polyphony  
394  
395  
396  
397  
398  
399  
400  
401  
402  
403  
404  
405  
406  
407  
408  
409  
410  
411  
412  
413  
414  
415  
416  
417  
418  
419  
420  
421  
422  
423  
424  
425  
426  
427  
428  
429  
430  
431  
432  
433  
434  
435  
436  
437  
438  
439  
440  
441  
442  
443  
444  
445  
446  
447  
448  
449  
450  
451  
GM  
GM  
94  
95  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
65  
66  
65  
70  
65  
65  
65  
67  
65  
67  
66  
65  
65  
65  
65  
66  
65  
66  
65  
66  
65  
66  
65  
65  
16  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
16  
32  
32  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SWEEP  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
GM  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
RAIN DROP  
SOUND TRACK  
CRYSTAL  
ATMOSPHERE  
BRIGHTNESS  
GOBLIN  
ECHOES  
SF  
SITAR  
BANJO GM  
SHAMISEN  
KOTO  
THUMB PIANO  
BAG PIPE  
FIDDLE  
SHANAI  
TINKLE BELL  
AGOGO  
STEEL DRUMS  
WOOD BLOCK  
TAIKO  
MELODIC TOM  
SYNTH-DRUM  
REVERSE CYMBAL  
GT FRET NOISE  
BREATH NOISE  
SEASHORE  
BIRD  
TELEPHONE  
HELICOPTER  
APPLAUSE  
GUNSHOT  
PIANO 1 WIDE  
MELLOW PIANO GM  
PIANO 2 WIDE  
TECHNO PIANO  
MODERN E.G.PIANO WIDE  
HONKY-TONK 2  
ELEC. PIANO 2  
60S E.PIANO GM  
MODERN EP + E.G.PIANO  
MODERN EP 3  
HARPSICHORD WIDE  
PULSE CLAVI GM  
VIBRAPHONE WIDE  
MARIMBA WIDE  
TREMOLO ORGAN GM  
DRAWBAR ORGAN 2 GM  
70S ORGAN GM  
JAZZ ORGAN GM  
CHURCH ORGAN 2 GM  
CHURCH ORGAN 3  
PUFF ORGAN  
NYLON GUITAR RLS  
12 STRING GUITAR GM  
PEDAL STEEL  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
0
0
1
1
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
7
11  
12  
16  
16  
17  
17  
19  
19  
20  
24  
25  
26  
A-8  
735A-E122A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Program Bank Select Maximum  
Range  
Type  
No.  
Tone Group  
Tone Name  
DSP Type  
Change  
MSB  
Polyphony  
452  
453  
454  
455  
456  
457  
458  
459  
460  
461  
462  
463  
464  
465  
466  
467  
468  
469  
470  
471  
472  
473  
474  
475  
476  
477  
478  
479  
480  
481  
482  
483  
484  
485  
486  
487  
488  
489  
490  
491  
492  
493  
494  
495  
496  
497  
498  
499  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
VARIOUS  
DETUNED CLEAN GT  
PLAIN ELEC. GUITAR REAR  
PLAIN ELEC. GUITAR FRONT  
FEEDBACK GUITAR GM  
GUITAR FEEDBACK  
SAW SYNTH-BASS 3  
RESO. SAW BASS 3  
SAW SYNTH-BASS 4  
ORGAN BASS 2  
27  
27  
27  
30  
31  
38  
38  
38  
38  
39  
39  
39  
39  
48  
48  
50  
50  
52  
53  
54  
54  
55  
55  
55  
55  
56  
57  
60  
61  
62  
62  
63  
63  
80  
80  
80  
81  
81  
81  
83  
84  
85  
87  
89  
89  
95  
96  
98  
65  
66  
67  
65  
65  
67  
72  
73  
74  
65  
72  
73  
74  
65  
66  
65  
66  
65  
65  
65  
66  
65  
66  
67  
73  
65  
65  
65  
65  
65  
66  
65  
66  
65  
66  
74  
65  
66  
68  
67  
68  
65  
65  
65  
68  
66  
66  
65  
16  
32  
32  
16  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
32  
32  
16  
16  
32  
16  
16  
16  
32  
32  
32  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SQR SYNTH-BASS 2  
KICK BASS 1  
SQR SYNTH-BASS 3  
ATTACK SQR BASS  
BRIGHT STRINGS GM  
OCTAVE STRINGS  
SYNTH-STRINGS 2  
PURE SYNTH-STRING  
CHOIR + UUH  
VOICE UUH GM  
SYNTH-VOICE 2 GM  
SEQ VOX  
BASS HIT GM  
POP HIT 3  
ORCHESTRA HIT 2  
TIMPANI HIT  
TRUMPET 2  
TROMBONE F GM  
MELLOW FRENCH HORN  
BRASS + TROMBONE  
SYNTH-BRASS 3  
OCTAVE SYNTH-BRASS  
SYNTH-BRASS SFZ  
BS SYNTH-BRASS  
SQUARE WAVE  
TRIANGLE WAVE  
SQUARE WAVE 3  
SAW WAVE  
SAW + SQR  
SEQ SAW 2  
PERC. CHIFF 2  
GT SYNTH-LEAD 2  
VOX LEAD 2  
BASS LEAD 3  
SINE SYNTH  
SOPRANO PAD  
FAST SWEEP  
WOOD PAD  
SYNTH-MALLET  
735A-E123A  
A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Drum Sets  
Program Bank Select  
No.  
Tone Group  
DRUM  
Tone Name  
STANDARD SET 1  
STANDARD SET 2  
ROOM SET  
POWER SET  
ELEC. SET  
SYNTH SET 1  
SYNTH SET 2  
JAZZ SET  
Change  
MSB  
500  
501  
502  
503  
504  
505  
506  
507  
508  
509  
510  
511  
512  
513  
514  
515  
0
1
8
120  
120  
120  
120  
120  
120  
120  
120  
120  
120  
120  
120  
120  
120  
120  
120  
DRUM  
DRUM  
DRUM  
DRUM  
DRUM  
DRUM  
DRUM  
DRUM  
DRUM  
DRUM  
DRUM  
DRUM  
DRUM  
DRUM  
DRUM  
16  
24  
25  
30  
32  
40  
48  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
BRUSH SET  
ORCHESTRA SET  
HIP-HOP SET 1  
HIP-HOP SET 2  
TECHNO SET 1  
TECHNO SET 2  
DANCE SET 1  
DANCE SET 2  
Drawbar Organ Tones  
Program Bank Select Maximum  
Range  
Type  
No.  
Tone Group  
Tone Name  
Drawbar Organ 1  
DSP Type  
Rotary  
Change  
MSB  
Polyphony  
0
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
0
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
10  
10  
16  
16  
16  
10  
16  
16  
16  
16  
10  
16  
16  
16  
10  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
10  
16  
16  
10  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Jazz Organ 1  
Full Drawbar  
Perc. Organ 1  
16+1Organ  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
OvdRotry  
Rotary  
OvdRotry  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
OvdRotry  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Soul Organ 1  
Overdrive Organ 1  
Drawbar Organ 2  
Block Organ 1  
Theater Organ 1  
Jazz Organ 2  
Soul Organ 2  
Gospel Organ 1  
Chorus Organ 1  
Overdrive Organ 2  
Block Organ 2  
Drawbar Organ 3  
Perc. Organ 2  
Theater Organ 2  
Gospel Organ 2  
Even Organ  
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
Flute Organ 1  
Chorus Organ 2  
Overdrive Organ 3  
16Organ  
Soul Organ 3  
Perc. Organ 3  
Drawbar Organ 4  
Perc. Organ 4  
Odd Organ  
Reed Organ 1  
Block Organ 3  
A-10  
735A-E124A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Program Bank Select Maximum  
Range  
Type  
No.  
Tone Group  
Tone Name  
Overdrive Organ 4  
Drawbar Organ 5  
Gospel Organ 3  
8+ 4Organ  
Block Organ 4  
String Organ 2  
Pure Organ 1  
Drawbar Organ 6  
Delay Organ 1  
Deep Chorus Organ  
Tremolo Organ  
Delay Organ 2  
LFO Wah Organ  
Dist. Organ Lead  
Ring Organ  
DSP Type  
Change  
MSB  
Polyphony  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
DRAWBAR  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
96  
10  
10  
16  
32  
32  
16  
32  
10  
10  
32  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
10  
16  
10  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
OvdRotry  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
Rotary  
StXDly 2  
Cho.Dly4  
Cho.Trem  
Cho.Dly6  
LWhChDl2  
MetalDly  
RingMod2  
RgChDly2  
LoFiRef2  
DistRing  
Mad Rotary Organ  
Old Organ  
Dist. Ring Organ  
NOTE  
Range  
Symbol  
Meaning  
Normal  
N
1  
2  
1
2
1/2  
1/4  
1 Octave Down  
2 Octave Down  
1 Octave Up  
2 Octave Up  
1/2 Octave  
1/4 Octave  
735A-E125A  
A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Drum Assignment List  
indicates the same sound as STANDARD SET.  
Program Change No. / Drum Set Name  
PC16: POWER SET PC24: ELEC SET  
Key/  
Note number  
PC1: STANDARD SET 2 PC8: ROOM SET  
PC30: SYNTH 2  
PC25: SYNTH 1  
PC0: STANDARD SET 1  
PC32: JAZZ SET  
HIGH Q  
SLAP  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
A0 21  
B0 23  
C1 24  
B 0 22  
C#1 25  
D1 26  
E 1 27  
E1 28  
F1 29  
SCRATCH PUSH  
SCRATCH PULL  
STICKS  
SQUARE CLICK  
METRONOME CLICK  
METRONOME BELL  
STANDARD 1 KICK 2  
STANDARD 1 KICK 1  
SIDE STICK  
STANDARD 1 SNARE 1 STANDARD 1 SNARE 1 ROOM SNARE 1  
HAND CLAP SYNTH HAND CLAP  
STANDARD 1 SNARE 2 STANDARD 1 SNARE 2 ROOM SNARE 2  
LOW TOM 2  
CLOSED HI-HAT  
LOW TOM 1  
PEDAL HI-HAT  
MID TOM 2  
OPEN HI-HAT  
MID TOM 1  
HIGH TOM 2  
CRASH CYMBAL 1  
HIGH TOM 1  
RIDE CYMBAL 1  
CHINESE CYMBAL  
RIDE BELL  
TAMBOURINE  
SPLASH CYMBAL  
COWBELL  
CRASH CYMBAL 2  
VIBRA-SLAP  
RIDE CYMBAL 2  
HIGH BONGO  
F#1 30  
G1 31  
A1 33  
A 1 32  
B 1 34  
B1 35  
C2 36  
STANDARD 2 KICK 2  
STANDARD 2 KICK 1  
ǟ
ROOM KICK 2  
ROOM KICK 1  
ǟ
POWER KICK 2  
POWER KICK 1  
ǟ
POWER SNARE 1  
ǟ
POWER SNARE 2  
ROOM LOW TOM 2  
ELEC KICK 2  
ELEC KICK 1  
ǟ
ELEC SNARE 1  
ǟ
ELEC SNARE 2  
ELEC LOW TOM 2  
SYNTH 1 KICK 1  
SYNTH 1 KICK 2  
SYNTH 1 RIM SHOT  
SYNTH 1 SNARE 1  
SYNTH HAND CLAP  
SYNTH 1 SNARE 2  
SYNTH 1 LOW TOM 2  
SYNTH 1 CHH 1  
SYNTH 1 LOW TOM 1  
SYNTH 1 CHH 2  
SYNTH 1 MID TOM 2  
SYNTH 1 OHH  
SYNTH 1 MID TOM 1  
SYNTH 1 HI TOM 2  
SYNTH 1 CYMBAL  
SYNTH 1 HI TOM 1  
ǟ
SYNTH 2 KICK 1  
SYNTH 2 KICK 2  
ǟ
SYNTH 2 SNARE 1  
ǟ
SYNTH 2 SNARE 2  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
JAZZ KICK 2  
JAZZ KICK 1  
ǟ
C#2 37  
JAZZ SNARE 1  
D2 38  
ǟ
ǟ
JAZZ SNARE 2  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
E 2 39  
E2 40  
F2 41  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ROOM LOW TOM 2  
ǟ
ROOM LOW TOM 1  
ǟ
ROOM MID TOM 2  
ǟ
ROOM MID TOM 1  
ROOM HI TOM 2  
ǟ
ǟ
F#2 42  
ROOM LOW TOM 1  
ǟ
ROOM MID TOM 2  
ǟ
ROOM MID TOM 1  
ROOM HI TOM 2  
ǟ
ELEC LOW TOM 1  
ǟ
ELEC MID TOM 2  
ǟ
ELEC MID TOM 1  
ELEC HI TOM 2  
ǟ
ELEC HI TOM 1  
ǟ
REVERSE CYMBAL  
G2 43  
A2 45  
A 2 44  
B 2 46  
B2 47  
C3 48  
ǟ
C#3 49  
ROOM HI TOM 1  
ROOM HI TOM 1  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
D3 50  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
E 3 51  
E3 52  
F3 53  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
F#3 54  
G3 55  
A3 57  
SYNTH 1 COWBELL  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
SYNTH 1 COWBELL  
A 3 56  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
B 3 58  
B3 59  
C4 60  
ǟ
C#4  
61 LOW BONGO  
MUTE HIGH CONGA  
63 OPEN HIGH CONGA  
LOW CONGA  
HIGH TIMBALE  
66 LOW TIMBALE  
HIGH AGOGO  
68 LOW AGOGO  
CABASA  
70 MARACAS  
SHORT HI WHISTLE  
LONG LOW WHISTLE  
73 SHORT GUIRO  
LONG GUIRO  
SYNTH 1 HIGH CONGA SYNTH 1 HIGH CONGA  
SYNTH 1 MID CONGA  
SYNTH 1 LOW CONGA SYNTH 1 LOW CONGA  
D4 62  
SYNTH 1 MID CONGA  
E 4  
E4 64  
F4 65  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
F#4  
G4 67  
A4 69  
A 4  
ǟ
ǟ
SYNTH 1 MARACAS  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
SYNTH 1 MARACAS  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
B 4  
B4 71  
C5 72  
C#5  
ǟ
ǟ
D5 74  
SYNTH 1 CLAVES  
E 5  
75 CLAVES  
SYNTH 1 CLAVES  
E5 76  
F5 77  
HIGH WOOD BLOCK  
LOW WOOD BLOCK  
F#5 78 MUTE CUICA  
OPEN CUICA  
A 5 80 MUTE TRIANGLE  
OPEN TRIANGLE  
B 5 82 SHAKER  
JINGLE BELL  
BELL TREE  
C#6 85 CASTANETS  
MUTE SURDO  
E 6 87 OPEN SURDO  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
G5 79  
A5 81  
B5 83  
C6 84  
D6 86  
E6 88  
F6 89  
APPLAUSE  
F#6 90  
G6 91  
A6 93  
A 6 92  
B 6 94  
B6 95  
C7 96  
C#7 97  
D7 98  
E 7 99  
E7 100  
F7 101  
F#7 102  
G7 103  
A7 105  
A 7 104  
B 7 106  
B7 107  
C8 108  
C#8 109  
D8 110  
E8 112  
E 8 111  
A-12  
735A-E126A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Program Change No. / Drum Set Name  
PC65: HIP-HOP SET 2 PC66:TECHNO SET 1  
Key/  
Note number  
PC48: ORCHESTRA SET PC64: HIP-HOP SET 1  
PC68: DANCE SET 1  
PC69: DANCE SET 2  
PC67:TECHNO SET 2  
PC40: BRUSH SET  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
WHITE NOISE  
LOOPED  
BEEP 1  
BEEP 2  
HIT 1  
HIT 2  
ǟ
ǟ
WHITE NOISE  
LOOPED  
BEEP 1  
BEEP 2  
HIT 1  
HIT 2  
ǟ
ǟ
WHITE NOISE  
LOOPED  
BEEP 1  
BEEP 2  
HIT 1  
HIT 2  
ǟ
ǟ
WHITE NOISE  
LOOPED  
BEEP 1  
BEEP 2  
HIT 1  
HIT 2  
ǟ
ǟ
WHITE NOISE  
LOOPED  
BEEP 1  
BEEP 2  
HIT 1  
HIT 2  
ǟ
ǟ
WHITE NOISE  
LOOPED  
BEEP 1  
BEEP 2  
HIT 1  
HIT 2  
ǟ
ǟ
A0 21  
B 0  
22  
B0 23  
C1 24  
C#1  
25  
D1 26  
CLOSED HI-HAT  
PEDAL HI-HAT  
OPEN HI-HAT  
RIDE CYMBAL 1  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
JAZZ KICK 1  
CONCERT BASS DRUM HIP-HOP KICK 1  
ǟ
CONCERT SNARE  
CASTANETS  
CONCERT SNARE  
TIMPANI F  
TIMPANI F  
TIMPANI G  
TIMPANI A  
TIMPANI A  
TIMPANI B  
TIMPANI B  
TIMPANI C  
TIMPANI C  
TIMPANI D  
TIMPANI E  
TIMPANI E  
TIMPANI F  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
E 1 27  
E1 28  
F1 29  
HIP-HOP SCRACH 1  
HIP-HOP SCRACH 2  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
HIP-HOP SCRACH 1  
HIP-HOP SCRACH 2  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
HIP-HOP KICK 4  
HIP-HOP KICK 3  
ǟ
HIP-HOP SNARE 3  
HAND CLAP 2  
HIP-HOP SNARE 4  
SYNTH 2 LOW TOM 2  
HIP-HOP CHH  
SYNTH 2 LOW TOM 1  
HIP-HOP PHH  
SYNTH 2 MID TOM 2  
HIP-HOP OHH  
SYNTH 2 MID TOM 1  
SYNTH 2 HI TOM 2  
SYNTH 2 CYMBAL  
SYNTH 2 HI TOM 1  
SYNTH 2 RIDE  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
HIP-HOP SCRACH 1  
HIP-HOP SCRACH 2  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
TECHNO KICK 2  
TECHNO KICK 1  
SYNTH 1 RIM SHOT  
TECHNO SNARE 1  
HAND CLAP 3  
TECHNO SNARE 2  
SYNTH 1 LOW TOM 2  
SYNTH 1 CHH  
SYNTH 1 LOW TOM 1  
SYNTH 1 PHH  
SYNTH 1 MID TOM 2  
SYNTH 1 OHH  
SYNTH 1 MID TOM 1  
SYNTH 1 HI TOM 2  
SYNTH 1 CYMBAL  
SYNTH 1 HI TOM 1  
SYNTH 1 RIDE  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
HIP-HOP SCRACH 1  
HIP-HOP SCRACH 2  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
TECHNO KICK 4  
TECHNO KICK 3  
SYNTH 1 RIM SHOT  
TECHNO SNARE 3  
HAND CLAP 3  
TECHNO SNARE 4  
SYNTH 1 LOW TOM 2  
TECHNO CHH 1  
SYNTH 1 LOW TOM 1  
TECHNO PHH  
SYNTH 1 MID TOM 2  
TECHNO OHH  
SYNTH 1 MID TOM 1  
SYNTH 1 HI TOM 2  
TECHNO CYMBAL  
SYNTH 1 HI TOM 1  
TECHNO CYMBAL  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
HIP-HOP SCRACH 1  
HIP-HOP SCRACH 2  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
DANCE KICK 2  
DANCE KICK 2  
SYNTH 1 RIM SHOT  
DANCE SNARE 1  
HAND CLAP 3  
DANCE SNARE 2  
ǟ
SYNTH 2 CHH  
ǟ
SYNTH 2 PHH  
ǟ
SYNTH 2 OHH  
ǟ
ǟ
HIP-HOP CLASH  
ǟ
HIP-HOP RIDE  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
HIP-HOP SCRACH 1  
HIP-HOP SCRACH 2  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
DANCE KICK 4  
DANCE KICK 3  
SYNTH 1 RIM SHOT  
DANCE SNARE 3  
HAND CLAP 3  
DANCE SNARE 4  
SYNTH 2 LOW TOM 2  
HIP-HOP CHH  
SYNTH 2 LOW TOM 1  
HIP-HOP PHH  
SYNTH 2 MID TOM 2  
HIP-HOP OHH  
SYNTH 2 MID TOM 1  
SYNTH 2 HI TOM 2  
TECHNO CYMBAL  
SYNTH 2 HI TOM 1  
TECHNO CYMBAL  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
F#1 30  
G1 31  
A1 33  
A 1 32  
B 1 34  
B1 35  
C2 36  
JAZZ KICK 2  
JAZZ KICK 1  
ǟ
BRUSH TAP  
BRUSH SLAP  
HIP-HOP KICK 2  
ǟ
C#2 37  
HIP-HOP SNARE 1  
HAND CLAP 2  
HIP-HOP SNARE 2  
ǟ
HIP-HOP CHH  
ǟ
HIP-HOP PHH  
ǟ
HIP-HOP OHH  
ǟ
ǟ
HIP-HOP CLASH  
ǟ
HIP-HOP RIDE  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
D2 38  
E 2 39  
E2 40  
F2 41  
BRUSH SWIRL  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
F#2 42  
G2 43  
A2 45  
A 2 44  
B 2 46  
B2 47  
C3 48  
C#3 49  
D3 50  
E 3 51  
E3 52  
F3 53  
F#3 54  
G3 55  
A3 57  
A 3 56  
CONCERT CYMBAL 2  
ǟ
CONCERT CYMBAL 1  
B 3 58  
B3 59  
C4 60  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
C#4  
61  
63  
D4 62  
E 4  
E4 64  
F4 65  
F#4  
66  
68  
70  
G4 67  
A4 69  
A 4  
B 4  
B4 71  
C5 72  
C#5  
73  
75  
D5 74  
E 5  
E5 76  
F5 77  
F#5 78  
G5 79  
A5 81  
A 5 80  
B 5 82  
B5 83  
C6 84  
C#6 85  
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
ǟ
D6 86  
E 6 87  
E6 88  
F6 89  
ELEC KICK 1  
SYNTH 1 KICK 1  
SYNTH 1 KICK 2  
DANCE KICK 3  
TECHNO KICK 1  
HIP-HOP BD 5  
HIP-HOP BD 6  
TECHNO KICK 4  
DANCE KICK 2  
DANCE KICK 1  
DANCE KICK 5  
DANCE KICK 6  
POWER SNARE 2  
SYNTH 1 SNARE 1  
SYNTH 1 SNARE 2  
SYNTH 2 SNARE 1  
SYNTH 2 SNARE 2  
HIP-HOP SNARE 5  
HIP-HOP SNARE 6  
TECHNO SNARE 3  
TECHNO SNARE 5  
TECHNO SNARE 6  
DANCE SNARE 4  
DANCE SNARE 5  
ELEC KICK 1  
SYNTH 1 KICK 1  
SYNTH 1 KICK 2  
DANCE KICK 3  
TECHNO KICK 1  
HIP-HOP BD 5  
HIP-HOP BD 6  
TECHNO KICK 4  
DANCE KICK 2  
DANCE KICK 1  
DANCE KICK 5  
DANCE KICK 6  
POWER SNARE 2  
SYNTH 1 SNARE 1  
SYNTH 1 SNARE 2  
SYNTH 2 SNARE 1  
SYNTH 2 SNARE 2  
HIP-HOP SNARE 5  
HIP-HOP SNARE 6  
TECHNO SNARE 3  
TECHNO SNARE 5  
TECHNO SNARE 6  
DANCE SNARE 4  
DANCE SNARE 5  
ELEC KICK 1  
SYNTH 1 KICK 1  
SYNTH 1 KICK 2  
DANCE KICK 3  
TECHNO KICK 1  
HIP-HOP BD 5  
HIP-HOP BD 6  
TECHNO KICK 4  
DANCE KICK 2  
DANCE KICK 1  
DANCE KICK 5  
DANCE KICK 6  
POWER SNARE 2  
SYNTH 1 SNARE 1  
SYNTH 1 SNARE 2  
SYNTH 2 SNARE 1  
SYNTH 2 SNARE 2  
HIP-HOP SNARE 5  
HIP-HOP SNARE 6  
TECHNO SNARE 3  
TECHNO SNARE 5  
TECHNO SNARE 6  
DANCE SNARE 4  
DANCE SNARE 5  
ELEC KICK 1  
SYNTH 1 KICK 1  
SYNTH 1 KICK 2  
DANCE KICK 3  
TECHNO KICK 1  
HIP-HOP BD 5  
HIP-HOP BD 6  
TECHNO KICK 4  
DANCE KICK 2  
DANCE KICK 1  
DANCE KICK 5  
DANCE KICK 6  
POWER SNARE 2  
SYNTH 1 SNARE 1  
SYNTH 1 SNARE 2  
SYNTH 2 SNARE 1  
SYNTH 2 SNARE 2  
HIP-HOP SNARE 5  
HIP-HOP SNARE 6  
TECHNO SNARE 3  
TECHNO SNARE 5  
TECHNO SNARE 6  
DANCE SNARE 4  
DANCE SNARE 5  
ELEC KICK 1  
SYNTH 1 KICK 1  
SYNTH 1 KICK 2  
DANCE KICK 3  
TECHNO KICK 1  
HIP-HOP BD 5  
HIP-HOP BD 6  
TECHNO KICK 4  
DANCE KICK 2  
DANCE KICK 1  
DANCE KICK 5  
DANCE KICK 6  
POWER SNARE 2  
SYNTH 1 SNARE 1  
SYNTH 1 SNARE 2  
SYNTH 2 SNARE 1  
SYNTH 2 SNARE 2  
HIP-HOP SNARE 5  
HIP-HOP SNARE 6  
TECHNO SNARE 3  
TECHNO SNARE 5  
TECHNO SNARE 6  
DANCE SNARE 4  
DANCE SNARE 5  
ELEC KICK 1  
SYNTH 1 KICK 1  
SYNTH 1 KICK 2  
DANCE KICK 3  
TECHNO KICK 1  
HIP-HOP BD 5  
HIP-HOP BD 6  
TECHNO KICK 4  
DANCE KICK 2  
DANCE KICK 1  
DANCE KICK 5  
DANCE KICK 6  
POWER SNARE 2  
SYNTH 1 SNARE 1  
SYNTH 1 SNARE 2  
SYNTH 2 SNARE 1  
SYNTH 2 SNARE 2  
HIP-HOP SNARE 5  
HIP-HOP SNARE 6  
TECHNO SNARE 3  
TECHNO SNARE 5  
TECHNO SNARE 6  
DANCE SNARE 4  
DANCE SNARE 5  
F#6 90  
G6 91  
A6 93  
A 6 92  
B 6 94  
B6 95  
C7 96  
C#7 97  
D7 98  
E 7 99  
E7 100  
F7 101  
F#7 102  
G7 103  
A7 105  
A 7 104  
B 7 106  
B7 107  
C8 108  
C#8 109  
D8 110  
E8 112  
E 8 111  
735A-E127A  
A-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Rhythm List  
No.  
Rhythm Name  
47  
48  
49  
SHUFFLE BOOGIE  
BLUES  
TWIST  
97  
98  
99  
BEGUINE  
BOLERO  
MAMBO  
RHUMBA  
TANGO 1  
TANGO 2  
REGGAE 1  
REGGAE 2  
SKA  
BLUEGRASS  
COUNTRY  
COUNTRY SHUFFLE  
COUNTRY WALTZ  
FAST GOSPEL  
SLOW GOSPEL  
BROADWAY  
JIVE  
DIXIE  
PASODOBLE  
SIRTAKI  
HAWAIAN  
ADANI  
BALADI  
8 BEAT  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8 BEAT 1  
8 BEAT 2  
8 BEAT 3  
8 BEAT POP 1  
8 BEAT POP 2  
8 BEAT POP 3  
60S SOUL  
8 BEAT DANCE  
POP ROCK 1  
POP ROCK 2  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
DANCE  
TRANCE 1  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
TRANCE 2  
AMBIENT 1  
AMBIENT 2  
AMBIENT 3  
RAVE  
TECHNO  
DIGITAL ROCK  
HOUSE  
LATIN HOUSE  
DANCE 1  
DANCE 2  
MODERN R&B  
HIP-HOP  
TRIP-HOP  
16 BEAT  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
16 BEAT 1  
16 BEAT 2  
16 BEAT 3  
SLOW 16 BEAT  
16 BEAT SHUFFLE 1  
16 BEAT SHUFFLE 1  
FUNK 1  
FUNK 2  
FUSION  
ELECTRIC POP  
DANCE POP 1  
DANCE POP 2  
DANCE POP 3  
DISCO SOUL  
LATIN FUSION  
FOR PIANO  
PIANO BALLAD 1  
POPS  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
JAZZ  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
POP  
SOUL  
PIANO BALLAD 2  
PIANO BALLAD 3  
EP BALLAD 1  
EP BALLAD 2  
BLUES BALLAD  
MELLOW JAZZ  
JAZZ COMBO 2  
RAGTIME  
BOOGIE WOOGIE  
ARPEGGIO 1  
ARPEGGIO 2  
ARPEGGIO 3  
PIANO BALLAD 4  
6/ 8 MARCH  
3.Mar  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
FAST BIG BAND  
MIDDLE BIG BAND  
SLOW BIG BAND  
JAZZ COMBO  
SWING  
SLOW SWING  
MODERAN JAZZ  
FOX TROT  
POP SHUFFLE 1  
POP SHUFFLE 2  
SOUL POP  
WORLD POP  
MELLOW R&B  
60S POP  
80S POP  
POP WALTZ  
QUICKSTEP  
JAZZ WALTZ  
BALLAD  
EUROPEAN  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
8 BEAT BALLAD 1  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
POLKA  
8 BEAT BALLAD 2  
8 BEAT BALLAD 3  
16 BEAT BALLAD 1  
16 BEAT BALLAD 2  
16 BEAT BALLAD 3  
6/ 8 BALLAD  
POP BALLAD  
OLDIES BALLAD  
SERENADE  
POLKA FOX  
POP POLKA  
1.Mar  
2.Mar  
GERMAN MARCH  
WALTZ 1  
WALTZ 2  
VINNESE WALTZ  
FRENCH WALTZ  
2 BEAT  
WALTZ 3  
WALTZ 4  
WALTZ 5  
ROCK  
LATIN/VARIOUS  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
ROCK 1  
ROCK 2  
R&B  
SHUFFLE ROCK  
SLOW ROCK  
HEAVY METAL  
60S ROCK  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
BOSSA NOVA 1  
BOSSA NOVA 2  
SAMBA  
MERENGUE  
CUMBIA  
CHA-CHA-CHA  
SALSA  
A-14  
735A-E128A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Fingered Chord Chart  
Cho rd  
Typ e  
M
m
7
m 7  
d im 7  
M7  
d im  
m 7-5  
Ro o t  
C
C / (D )  
D
(D )/ E  
E
F
F / (G )  
G
(G )/ A  
A
(A )/ B  
B
You can use the above fingerings to finger chords within the accompaniment keyboard range.  
*
735A-E129A  
A-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Cho rd  
Typ e  
7-5  
m a d d 9  
m M7  
a d d 9  
a ug  
sus4  
7sus4  
Ro o t  
C
C / (D )  
D
(D )/ E  
E
F
F / (G )  
G
(G )/ A  
A
(A )/ B  
B
A-16  
735A-E130A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
f
E
735A-E-131A  
A-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
A-18  
735A-E-132A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
h
a
A
0
h
a
3
L
0
0
L
A
r
A
T
2
DSP  
0
0
0
735A-E-133A  
A-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
S
P
0
1
L
D
0
0
C
0
A-20  
735A-E-134A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
L
1
E
R
1
1
R
D
:
1
1
1
735A-E-135A  
A-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
a
S
3
2
2
r
T
S
1
2
1
S
3
1
1
1
A-22  
735A-E-136A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
e
R
F
R
2
2
2
R
2
G
2
735A-E-137A  
A-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
S
a
2
1
M
M
a
2
a
3
3
M
D
M
l
:
:
M
M
M
a
2
2
A-24  
735A-E-138A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
A
S
L
a
1
M
C
:
1
M
M
M
F
r
T
M
(
M
M
a
2
F
1
M
M
M
735A-E-139A  
A-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
S
E
(
a
M
T
1
M
M
R
L
R
M
M
M
D
R
M
M
M
A-26  
735A-E-140A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
2
a
2
D
D
a
(
a
M
T
M
D
:
M
M
S
1
R
(
a
t
l
u
2
M
C
M
M
M
r
r
T
T
1
a
a
a
a
(
2
2
M
A
M
r
M
r
:
:
M
M
M
735A-E-141A  
A-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
F
S
(
M
r
M
M
a
2
a
3
P
D
a
M
D
:
M
M
M
A-28  
735A-E-142A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
735A-E-143A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
735A-E-144A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
ꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄꢄ  
735A-E-145A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
735A-E-146A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
735A-E-147A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Limited One-Year Warranty  
This product is warranted by RadioShack against manufacturing defects in material and workman-  
ship under normal use for one (1) year from the date of purchase from RadioShack company-owned  
stores and authorized RadioShack franchisees and dealers. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, Ra-  
dioShack MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING  
THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED  
IN DURATION TO THE DURATION OF THE WRITTEN LIMITED WARRANTIES CONTAINED  
HEREIN. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, RadioShack SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY OR RE-  
SPONSIBILITY TO CUSTOMER OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY WITH RESPECT TO ANY  
LIABILITY, LOSS OR DAMAGE CAUSED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY BY USE OR PERFOR-  
MANCE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY, IN-  
CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM INCONVENIENCE, LOSS  
OF TIME, DATA, PROPERTY, REVENUE, OR PROFIT OR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDEN-  
TAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF RadioShack HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion or limita-  
tion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to  
you.  
In the event of a product defect during the warranty period, take the product and the RadioShack  
sales receipt as proof of purchase date to any RadioShack store. RadioShack will, at its option, un-  
less otherwise provided by law: (a) correct the defect by product repair without charge for parts and  
labor; (b) replace the product with one of the same or similar design; or (c) refund the purchase  
price. All replaced parts and products, and products on which a refund is made, become the property  
of RadioShack. New or reconditioned parts and products may be used in the performance of war-  
ranty service. Repaired or replaced parts and products are warranted for the remainder of the origi-  
nal warranty period. You will be charged for repair or replacement of the product made after the  
expiration of the warranty period.  
This warranty does not cover: (a) damage or failure caused by or attributable to acts of God, abuse,  
accident, misuse, improper or abnormal usage, failure to follow instructions, improper installation or  
maintenance, alteration, lightning or other incidence of excess voltage or current; (b) any repairs  
other than those provided by a RadioShack Authorized Service Facility; (c) consumables such as  
fuses or batteries; (d) cosmetic damage; (e) transportation, shipping or insurance costs; or (f) costs  
of product removal, installation, set-up service adjustment or reinstallation.  
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from  
state to state.  
RadioShack Customer Relations, 200 Taylor Street, 6th Floor, Fort Worth, TX 76102  
12/99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Radio Shack Network Card 273 356 User Guide
RCA CRT Television F27450, F32444, F32450, F36444, F36450 User Guide
Reliable Iron empressa s330 User Guide
Rosewill Network Card RNX G100 User Guide
Rowenta Iron DZ5020 User Guide
Samsung Answering Machine TAD 798 User Guide
Sanyo Griddle HPS SG4 User Guide
Sanyo Projector HF10000L User Guide
Seagate Power Supply ST318753FC User Guide
Sennheiser Headphones HD 270 Control User Guide